Download
Share
Print this page
Mitsubishi Electric M800V Series Programming Manual
  1. Manuals
  2. Brands
  3. Mitsubishi Electric Manuals
  4. Industrial Equipment
  5. M800V Series
  6. Programming manual
Mitsubishi Electric M800V Series Programming Manual

Mitsubishi Electric M800V Series Programming Manual

Numerical control (cnc)
Hide thumbs Also See for M800V Series:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
350
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
362
363
364
365
366
367
368
369
370
371
372
373
374
375
376
377
378
379
380
381
382
383
384
385
386
387
388
389
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
398
399
400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
423
424
425
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
442
443
444
445
446
447
448
449
450
451
452
453
454
455
456
457
458
459
460
461
462
463
464
465
466
467
468
469
470
471
472
473
474
475
476
477
478
479
480
481
482
483
484
485
486
487
488
489
490
491
492
493
494
495
496
497
498
499
500
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
512
513
514
515
516
517
518
519
520
521
522
523
524
525
526
527
528
529
530
531
532
533
534
535
536
537
538
539
540
541
542
543
544
545
546
547
548
549
550
551
552
553
554
555
556
557
558
559
560
561
562
563
564
565
566
567
568
569
570
571
572
573
574
575
576
577
578
579
580
581
582
583
584
585
586
587
588
589
590
591
592
593
594
595
596
597
598
599
600
601
602
603
604
605
606
607
608
609
610
611
612
613
614
615
616
617
618
619
620
621
622
623
624
625
626
627
628
629
630
631
632
633
634
635
636
637
638
639
640
641
642
643
644
645
646
647
648
649
650
651
652
653
654
655
656
657
658
659
660
661
662
663
664
665
666
667
668
669
670
671
672
673
674
675
676
677
678
679
680
681
682
683
684
685
686
687
688
689
690
691
692
693
694
695
696
697
698
699
700
701
702
703
704
705
706
707
708
709
710
711
712
713
714
715
716
717
718
719
720
721
722
723
724
725
726
727
728
729
730
731
732
733
734
735
736
737
738
739
740
741
742
743
744
745
746
747
748
749
750
751
752
753
754
755
756
757
758
759
760
761
762
763
764
765
766
767
768
769
770
771
772
773
774
775
776
777
778
779
780
781
782
783
784
785
786
787
788
789
790
791
792
793
794
795
796
797
798
799
800
801
802
803
804
805
806
807
808
809
810
811
812
813
814
815
816
817
818
819
820
821
822
823
824
825
826
827
828
829
830
831
832
833
834
835
836
837
838
839
840
841
842
843
844
845
846
847
848
849
850
851
852
853
854
855
856
857
858
859
860
861
862
863
864
865
866
867
868
869
870
871
872
873
874
875
876
877
878
879
880
881
882
883
884
885
886
887
888
889
890
891
892
893
894
895
896
897
898
899
900
901
902
903
904
905
906
907
908
909
910
911
912
913
914
915
916
917
918
919
920
921
922
923
924
925
926
927
928
929
930
931
932
933
934
935
936
937
938
939
940
941
942
943
944
945
946
947
948
949
950
951
952
953
954
955
956
957
958
959
960
961
962
963
964
965
966
967
968
969
970
971
972
973
974
975
976
977
978
979
980
981
982
983
984
985
986
987
988
989
990

Advertisement

Quick Links

Download this manual
Numerical Control (CNC)
Programming Manual (Lathe System)
M800V/M80V Series
IB-1501619(ENG)-H

Advertisement

loading
Need help?

Need help?

Do you have a question about the M800V Series and is the answer not in the manual?

Questions and answers

Related Manuals for Mitsubishi Electric M800V Series

Summary of Contents for Mitsubishi Electric M800V Series

  • Page 1 Numerical Control (CNC) Programming Manual (Lathe System) M800V/M80V Series IB-1501619(ENG)-H...
  • Page 2 Introduction This manual describes the information for programming on Mitsubishi Electric CNC. Improper handling can cause unexpected malfunctions. To use this device correctly, be sure to read this manual before use. Supported models of this manual are as follows: Supported models...
  • Page 3 Manual List Manuals related to M800V/M80V Series are listed as follows. These manuals are written on the assumption that all optional functions are added to the targeted model. Some functions or screens may not be available depending on the machine or specifications set by MTB. (Confirm the specifications before use.) The manuals issued by MTB take precedence over these manuals.
  • Page 4 Manuals for MTBs (NC) Manual IB No. Purpose and Contents  Model selection M800V/M80V Series IB-1501610 Specifications Manual (Function)  Outline of various functions  Model selection M800V/M80V Series IB-1501611 Specifications Manual (Hardware)  Specifications of hardware unit  Detailed specifications of hardware unit M800VW/M80VW Series IB-1501612 Connection and Setup Manual...
  • Page 5 GOT2000 Series Connection Manual  Outline of connection types and connection method between SH-081197ENG (Mitsubishi Electric Products) GOT and Mitsubishi Electric connection devices GOT2000 Series Connection Manual SH-081198ENG (Non-Mitsubishi Electric Products 1)  Explanation for connection types and connection method...
  • Page 6 Reference Manual for MTBs Manual Purpose and Contents M800/M80 Series Smart safety BNP-C3072-022  Explanation for smart safety observation function observation Specification manual M800/M80 Series Interactive cycle BNP-C3072-121- insertion (Customization)  Explanation for interactive cycle insertion 0003 Specification manual M800/M80 Series Synchronous BNP-C3072-074 ...
  • Page 7 For Safe Use Mitsubishi Electric CNC is designed and manufactured solely for applications to machine tools to be used for industrial pur- poses. Do not use this product in any applications other than those specified above, especially those which are substantially influ- ential on the public interest or which are expected to have significant influence on human lives or properties.
  • Page 8 (*1) Denial-of-service (Dos) refers to a type of cyber-attack that disrupts services by overloading the system or by ex- ploiting a vulnerability of the system. Mitsubishi Electric assumes no responsibility for any problems caused to the NC system by any type of cyber-attacks including DoS attack, unauthorized access and computer virus.
  • Page 9 CAUTION 3. Items related to programming The commands with "no value after G" will be handled as "G00". ";" "EOB" and "%" "EOR" are expressions used for explanation. The actual codes are: For ISO: "CR, LF", or "LF" and "%". Programs created on the Edit screen are stored in the NC memory in a "CR, LF"...
  • Page 10 This symbol mark is according to the directive 2006/66/EC Article 20 Information for end-users and Annex II. Your MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC product is designed and manufactured with high quality materials and components which can be recycled and/or reused. This symbol means that batteries and accumulators, at their end-of-life, should be disposed of separately from your household waste.
  • Page 11 CC-Link IE/field, CC-Link IE/field Basic, CC-Link IE TSN, EcoMonitorLight and SLMP are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Mitsubishi Electric Corporation in Japan and/or other countries. Ethernet is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
  • Page 12 本製品の取扱いについて ( 日本語 /Japanese) 本製品は工業用 ( クラス A) 電磁環境適合機器です。販売者あるいは使用者はこの点に注意し、住商業環境以外での使用を お願いいたします。 Handling of our product (English) This is a class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures. 본...
  • Page 13 Contents Chapter 1 - 14 : Refer to Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) Chapter 15 and later : Refer to Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 1 Control Axes..............................1 1.1 Coordinate Words and Control Axes ........................2 1.2 Coordinate Systems and Coordinate Zero Point Symbols ..................4 2 Minimum Command Unit ..........................
  • Page 14 6.8.5 Preparatory Function............................ 121 6.8.6 Switching from Milling Mode to Turning Mode; G13.1.................. 126 6.8.7 Feed Functions............................. 127 6.8.8 Tool Length Compensation .......................... 128 6.8.9 Tool Radius Compensation .......................... 130 6.8.9.1 Tool Radius Compensation Operation....................131 6.8.10 Relationship between Milling Interpolation and Other Functions ............... 145 6.9 Cylindrical Interpolation;...
  • Page 15 12 Tool Compensation Functions ......................321 12.1 Tool Compensation............................. 322 12.1.1 Tool Compensation Start ........................... 323 12.1.2 Expanded Method of Starting Tool Compensation ..................325 12.1.3 Allocation of Tool Compensation Sets to Part Systems................328 12.1.4 Tool Compensation for Additional Axes ..................... 330 12.1.5 Tool Compensation for 2nd Additional Axis ....................
  • Page 16 14 Macro Functions ............................ 533 14.1 Subprogram Control; M98, M99, M198....................... 534 14.1.1 Subprogram Call; M98, M99 ........................534 14.1.2 Subprogram Call; M198 ..........................540 14.2 Variable Commands............................542 14.3 User Macro................................548 14.4 Macro Call Instructions............................549 14.4.1 Simple Macro Calls; G65..........................550 14.4.2 Modal Call A (Movement Command Call) ;...
  • Page 17 15.13 Program Format Switch; G188/G189 ....................... 693 15.14 Vibration Cutting Control (VCC); G08.5......................704 15.15 Two-Dimensional Barcode Engraving Cycle; G136..................722 15.16 Text Engraving Cycle; G135..........................737 15.17 Chatter Suppression ............................748 16 Multi-part System Control ........................753 16.1 Timing Synchronization Operation........................754 16.1.1 Timing Synchronization Operation (! code) !n (!m ...) L ................
  • Page 18 19 Advanced Machining Control ......................1063 19.1 Inclined Surface Machining; G68.2, G68.4/G69.1..................... 1064 19.1.1 How to Define Feature Coordinate System Using Roll-Pitch-Yaw Angles ..........1067 19.1.2 Details of Inclined Surface Machining Operation ..................1069 19.1.3 Rotary Axis Reference Position Selection ....................1070 19.1.4 Inclined Surface Machining Multi-command.....................
  • Page 19 23.14 System Variables (Message Display and Stop)....................1270 23.15 System Variables (Cumulative Time) ......................1271 23.16 System Variables (Time Read Variables)....................... 1272 23.17 System Variables (Machining Information) ..................... 1274 23.18 System Variables (Number of Workpiece Machining Times) ................. 1275 23.19 System Variables (Mirror Image) ........................1275 23.20 System Variables (Acquiring the Program Execution Part System No.)............
  • Page 20 Control Axes IB-1501619-H...
  • Page 21 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 1 Control Axes 1.1 Coordinate Words and Control Axes 1Control Axes 1.1 Coordinate Words and Control Axes Function and purpose In the case of a lathe, axis names (coordinate words) and directions are defined as follows. The axis at right angles to the spindle Axis name: X axis The axis parallel to the spindle...
  • Page 22 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 1 Control Axes 1.1 Coordinate Words and Control Axes Relationship between coordinates Reference position Basic machine coordinate Workpiece coordinate zero point Local coordinate zero point IB-1501619-H...
  • Page 23 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 1 Control Axes 1.2 Coordinate Systems and Coordinate Zero Point Symbols 1.2 Coordinate Systems and Coordinate Zero Point Symbols Reference position: A specific position to establish coordinate systems and change tools Basic machine coordinate zero point: A position specific to machine Workpiece coordinate zero points (G54 to G59) A coordinate zero point used for workpiece machining...
  • Page 24 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 1 Control Axes 1.2 Coordinate Systems and Coordinate Zero Point Symbols Reference position Basic machine coordinate zero point Workpiece coordinate zero points Local coordinate zero point Offset set by a parameter Offset set by a program ("0"...
  • Page 25 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 1 Control Axes 1.2 Coordinate Systems and Coordinate Zero Point Symbols IB-1501619-H...
  • Page 26 Minimum Command Unit IB-1501619-H...
  • Page 27 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 2 Minimum Command Unit 2.1 Input Setting Unit and Program Command Unit 2Minimum Command Unit 2.1 Input Setting Unit and Program Command Unit Function and purpose The input setting units are the units of setting data including tool compensation amounts and workpiece coordinates compensation.
  • Page 28 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 2 Minimum Command Unit 2.2 Indexing Increment 2.2 Indexing Increment Function and purpose This function limits the command value for the rotary axis. This can be used for indexing the rotary table, etc. It is possible to cause a program error with a program command other than an indexing increment (parameter setting value).
  • Page 29 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 2 Minimum Command Unit 2.2 Indexing Increment IB-1501619-H...
  • Page 30 Program Formats IB-1501619-H...
  • Page 31 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 3 Program Formats 3.1 Program Format 3Program Formats 3.1 Program Format A collection of commands assigned to an NC to move a machine is called "program". A program is a collection of units called "block" which specifies a sequence of machine tool operations. Blocks are written in the order of the actual movement of a tool.
  • Page 32 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 3 Program Formats 3.1 Program Format Detailed description Program A program format looks as follows. (COMMENT) Block Block Block Block Block Block Block Block (1) Program start Input an End Of Record (EOR, %) at the head of a program. It is automatically added when writing a program on an NC.
  • Page 33 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 3 Program Formats 3.1 Program Format Block and word [Block] Word Word Word Word A block is a least command increment, consisting of words. It contains the information which is required for a machine tool to execute a specific operation. One block unit con- stitutes a complete command.
  • Page 34 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 3 Program Formats 3.1 Program Format Main program and subprograms Subprogram 1 Main program O1000; O0010; M98P1000; M99; M98P2000; Subprogram 2 O2000; M02; M99; Fixed sequences or repeatedly used parameters can be stored in the memory as subprograms which can then be called from the main program when required.
  • Page 35 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 3 Program Formats 3.2 File Format 3.2 File Format Function and purpose Program file can be created using NC edit screen and PC. It can be input/output between NC memory and an external I/O device. Hard discs stored in NC unit are regarded as an external I/O device.
  • Page 36 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 3 Program Formats 3.2 File Format Program file format The file format for each external I/O device is as follows: (1) NC memory, NC memory 2 (Creates program on NC) (COMMENT) ; G28 XYZ ; M02 ;...
  • Page 37 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 3 Program Formats 3.2 File Format (3) External device (serial) O100(COMMENT) G28 XYZ End of record (EOR, %) The first line (from % to LF, or CR LF) will be skipped. Also, the content after the second % will not be transferred.
  • Page 38 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 3 Program Formats 3.3 Optional Block Skip 3.3 Optional Block Skip 3.3.1 Optional Block Skip; / Function and purpose This function selectively ignores a section of a machining program from a "/" (slash code) to the end of the block. Detailed description Provided that the optional block skip switch is ON, a section of a machining program from a "/"...
  • Page 39 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 3 Program Formats 3.3 Optional Block Skip (3) When the parameter "#1274 ext10/bit4" is set to "1" : When a "/" is placed in a bracketed expression or when an expression that includes a "/" is on the right side of an equation, the "/"...
  • Page 40 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 3 Program Formats 3.3 Optional Block Skip 3.3.2 Optional Block Skip Addition ; /n Function and purpose Whether the block with "/n (n:1 to 9)" (slash) is executed during automatic operation and searching is selected. By using the machining program with "/n"...
  • Page 41 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 3 Program Formats 3.3 Optional Block Skip (2) When two or more "/n" codes are commanded at the head of the same block, the block will be ignored if either of the optional block skip n signals corresponding to the command is ON. N01 G90 Z3.
  • Page 42 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 3 Program Formats 3.4 G Code 3.4 G Code 3.4.1 Modal, Unmodal G codes define the operation modes of each block in programs. G codes can be modal or unmodal command. Modal commands always designate one of the G codes in the group as the NC operation mode. The operation mode is maintained until a cancel command is issued or other G code among the same group is commanded.
  • Page 43 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 3 Program Formats 3.4 G Code 3.4.3 Table of G Code Lists G code lists Standard Special Group Function name Section ΔG00 ΔG00 ΔG00 ΔG00 ΔG00 ΔG00 Positioning ΔG0.5 ΔG0.5 ΔG0.5 ΔG0.5 Rapid traverse block overlap 7.14 ΔG01 ΔG01...
  • Page 44 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 3 Program Formats 3.4 G Code G code lists Standard Special Group Function name Section Barrier check ON 21.1 *G23 *G23 *G23 *G23 Barrier check OFF 21.1 Soft limit ON/Stored stroke check before 21.2 travel ON Soft limit OFF/Stored stroke check before...
  • Page 45 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 3 Program Formats 3.4 G Code G code lists Standard Special Group Function name Section Basic machine coordinate system selec- 20.3 tion G53.1 G53.1 G53.1 G53.1 Tool axis direction control 19.2 *G54 *G54 *G54 *G54 *G54...
  • Page 46 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 3 Program Formats 3.4 G Code G code lists Standard Special Group Function name Section Compound type thread cutting cycle 13.3.7 ● Multi-part system simultaneous thread 16.6.1 cutting cycle parameter setting command G76.1 G76.1 G76.1 G76.1...
  • Page 47 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 3 Program Formats 3.4 G Code G code lists Standard Special Group Function name Section ΔG97 ΔG97 ΔG97 ΔG97 ΔG97 ΔG97 Constant surface speed control cancel 10.2 ΔG98 ΔG94 ΔG98 ΔG94 ΔG98 ΔG94 Feed per minute (asynchronous feed) ΔG99 ΔG95...
  • Page 48 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 3 Program Formats 3.4 G Code G code lists Standard Special Group Function name Section G174 G174 G174 G174 Simple tool center point control 19.2 G175 G175 G175 G175 Simple tool center point control cancel 19.2 G176 G176...
  • Page 49 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 3 Program Formats 3.4 G Code Precautions (1) A program error (P34) will occur if a G code unlisted on the Table of G code lists is commanded. (2) An alarm will occur if a G code without additional specifications is commanded. (3) An (*) symbol indicates the G code to be selected in each group when the power is turned ON or when a reset is executed to initialize the modal.
  • Page 50 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 3 Program Formats 3.5 Precautions before Starting Machining 3.5 Precautions before Starting Machining CAUTION When creating the machining program, select the appropriate machining conditions, and make sure that the performance, capacity and limits of the machine and NC are not exceeded. The examples do not take into ac- count the machining conditions.
  • Page 51 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 3 Program Formats 3.5 Precautions before Starting Machining IB-1501619-H...
  • Page 52 Pre-read Buffer IB-1501619-H...
  • Page 53 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 4 Pre-read Buffer 4.1 Pre-read Buffer 4Pre-read Buffer 4.1 Pre-read Buffer Function and purpose During automatic processing, the contents of one block ahead are normally pre-read so that program analysis pro- cessing is conducted smoothly. However, during tool nose radius compensation, a maximum of 5 blocks are pre- read for the intersection point calculation including interference check.
  • Page 54 Position Commands IB-1501619-H...
  • Page 55 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 5 Position Commands 5.1 Absolute Command/Incremental Command; G90, G91 5Position Commands 5.1 Absolute Command/Incremental Command; G90, G91 Function and purpose There are two methods of issuing tool movement amount commands: the absolute command method, and the in- cremental command method.
  • Page 56 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 5 Position Commands 5.1 Absolute Command/Incremental Command; G90, G91 Detailed description Selection of absolute command or incremental command by an axis address When the parameter "#1076 AbsInc" is set to "1", an axis address selects either the absolute command or incre- mental command.
  • Page 57 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 5 Position Commands 5.2 Diameter Designation and Radius Designation 5.2 Diameter Designation and Radius Designation 5.2.1 Diameter/Radius Designation Function and purpose On a lathe, a workpiece rotates, so its coordinate positions, dimensions, and commands can be designated by ra- dius/ diameter values.
  • Page 58 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 5 Position Commands 5.2 Diameter Designation and Radius Designation 5.2.2 Diameter/Radius Designation Switch; G10.9 Function and purpose The method of commanding a travel distance (command with a diameter dimension/command with a radius dimen- sion (as-is distance)) in a program is defined individually for each axis depending on MTB specifications (parameter "#1019 dia").
  • Page 59 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 5 Position Commands 5.2 Diameter Designation and Radius Designation Detailed description (1) G10.9 is a non-modal command that belongs to Group 0. (2) G10.9 is effective for all the G code lists. (3) If G10.9 is commanded together with any other G code in a block, the program error (P33) occurs. (4) For the axis name, specify the axis name that is set in "#1013 axname"...
  • Page 60 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 5 Position Commands 5.2 Diameter Designation and Radius Designation (6) Mixed control I (cross control) If a mixed control I command is given to an axis for which diameter/radius designation is being switched by G10.9, the program error (P503) occurs.
  • Page 61 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 5 Position Commands 5.2 Diameter Designation and Radius Designation Program example The table below shows program example that switches the X-axis diameter/radius designation with the diameter/ radius designation switch command (G10.9) to perform milling after performing turning with the following parameter settings.
  • Page 62 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 5 Position Commands 5.2 Diameter Designation and Radius Designation Precautions (1) If diameter/radius designation is switched, the travel distance changes even though the command value is un- changed. Thus special care must be taken when creating or executing a machining program. (2) Command the feedrate with the radius value regardless of whether the diameter designation or radius designa- tion is selected.
  • Page 63 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 5 Position Commands 5.3 Inch/Metric Conversion; G20, G21 5.3 Inch/Metric Conversion; G20, G21 Function and purpose The commands can be changed between inch and metric with the G20/G21 command. Command format Inch command G20 ;...
  • Page 64 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 5 Position Commands 5.3 Inch/Metric Conversion; G20, G21 Related parameters The following parameters are related to inch/metric changeover, and depend on the MTB specifications. (1) Initial inch/millimeter selection (#1041 I_inch) The following unit systems are affected. Command unit for when the power is turned ON and reset is performed (inch/metric command mode) When NC is reset in reset modal retention (#1151 rstint = 0) or in reset modal retention (#1210 RstGmd/bit5 = 1) for G code of G code group 06, the unit follows the G20/G21 command modal.
  • Page 65 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 5 Position Commands 5.3 Inch/Metric Conversion; G20, G21 Output unit, command unit and setting unit The unit is as follows depending on each parameter setting. (This depends on the MTB specifications.) Item #1041 I_inch = 0 #1041 I_inch = 1 #1226/bit6 = 0 #1226/bit6 = 1...
  • Page 66 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 5 Position Commands 5.4 Decimal Point Input 5.4 Decimal Point Input Function and purpose This function enables to input decimal points. It assigns the decimal point in millimeter or inch units for the machining program input information that defines the tool paths, distances and speeds.
  • Page 67 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 5 Position Commands 5.4 Decimal Point Input Decimal point input type I and II, and decimal point command validity Decimal point input type I and II will result as follows when decimal points are not used at an address where a dec- imal point command is valid.
  • Page 68 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 5 Position Commands 5.4 Decimal Point Input Address Decimal point Usage Remarks command Valid Automatic tool length measurement: Deceleration distance "d" Invalid Parameter input by program: Byte type data Invalid Spindle synchronization: Designation of synchronized spindle Invalid Multi-spindle control: Spindle designation Invalid...
  • Page 69 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 5 Position Commands 5.4 Decimal Point Input Address Decimal point Usage Remarks command Valid Coordinate position data Invalid Sequence Nos. in subprograms Invalid Parameter input by program: Bit type data Invalid Selection of intersection point between line and circular arc Invalid Spindle synchronization or spindle superimposition: Reference spindle designation...
  • Page 70 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 5 Position Commands 5.4 Decimal Point Input Address Decimal point Usage Remarks command Invalid Subprogram Number of repetitions Invalid Tool compensation data input by program/workpiece offset input: type se- L2/L10/L11/ lection Invalid Parameter input by program: Selection Invalid Parameter input by program: 2-word type data 4 bytes...
  • Page 71 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 5 Position Commands 5.4 Decimal Point Input Address Decimal point Usage Remarks command Invalid Minimum spindle clamp speed Invalid MRC finishing shape, sub part system I, or sub part system II: End se- quence No.
  • Page 72 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 5 Position Commands 5.4 Decimal Point Input Address Decimal point Usage Remarks command Invalid Spindle function codes Invalid Maximum spindle clamp speed Invalid Surface speed for constant surface speed control or constant surface speed cancel Invalid Parameter input by program: Word type data...
  • Page 73 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 5 Position Commands 5.4 Decimal Point Input Program example (1) Program example of decimal point valid address Program example Decimal point input type I Decimal point input type II 1 = 1 μm 1 = 10 μm 1 = 1 mm G00 X123.45...
  • Page 74 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 5 Position Commands 5.4 Decimal Point Input 5.4.1 Decimal Point Command Valid/Invalid Address Changeover Function and purpose The validity of the decimal point command can be determined by an address regardless of the application. The validity of this function depends on the MTB specifications (parameter "#1274 ext10/bit0").
  • Page 75 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 5 Position Commands 5.4 Decimal Point Input IB-1501619-H...
  • Page 76 Interpolation Functions IB-1501619-H...
  • Page 77 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 6 Interpolation Functions 6.1 Positioning (Rapid Traverse); G00 6Interpolation Functions 6.1 Positioning (Rapid Traverse); G00 Function and purpose This command is accompanied by coordinate words and performs high-speed positioning of a tool, from the present point (start point) to the end point specified by the coordinate words.
  • Page 78 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 6 Interpolation Functions 6.1 Positioning (Rapid Traverse); G00 Tool path Whether the tool moves along a linear or non-linear path varies depending on the MTB specifications (parameter "#1086 G0Intp"). The positioning time does not change according to the path. (1) Linear path (When parameter "#1086 G0Intp"...
  • Page 79 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 6 Interpolation Functions 6.1 Positioning (Rapid Traverse); G00 Program example (+180,+300) (S) Start point (E) End point (+100,+150) (mm) G00 X100. Z150. ; Absolute command G00 U-80. W-150. ; Incremental command Precautions for deceleration check There are three methods of carrying out a deceleration check: the command deceleration check method, the smoothing check method, and the in-position check method.
  • Page 80 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 6 Interpolation Functions 6.2 Linear Interpolation; G01 6.2 Linear Interpolation; G01 Function and purpose This command is accompanied by coordinate words and a feedrate command. It makes the tool move (interpolate) linearly from its current position to the end point specified by the coordinate words at the speed specified by address F.
  • Page 81 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 6 Interpolation Functions 6.2 Linear Interpolation; G01 Note (1) Refer to section "6.1 Positioning (Rapid Traverse); G00" for details on the in-position check operation. Program example (Example 1) 20.0 50.0 (mm) G01 X50.0 Z20.0 F300 ; (Example 2) Cutting in the sequence of P1 ->...
  • Page 82 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 6 Interpolation Functions 6.3 Circular Interpolation; G02, G03 6.3 Circular Interpolation; G02, G03 Function and purpose This function moves a tool along a circular arc on the selected plane by using the end coordinate and center coor- dinate given by the machining program.
  • Page 83 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 6 Interpolation Functions 6.3 Circular Interpolation; G02, G03 Detailed description (1) The circular arc center coordinate must be commanded in the input setting unit. Caution is required for the cir- cular arc command of an axis for which the program command unit differs. Command with a decimal point to avoid confusion.
  • Page 84 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 6 Interpolation Functions 6.3 Circular Interpolation; G02, G03 (3) An arc which extends for more than one quadrant can be executed with a single block command. (4) The following information is needed for circular interpolation. (a) Rotation direction Clockwise (G02) or counterclockwise (G03) (b) Circular end point co-...
  • Page 85 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 6 Interpolation Functions 6.3 Circular Interpolation; G02, G03 Program example 50.0 120.0 20.0 70.0 50.0 (mm) G02 X120.0 Z70.0 I50.0 F200 ; Absolute command G02 U100.0 W-50.0 I50.0 F200 ; Incremental command IB-1501619-H...
  • Page 86 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 6 Interpolation Functions 6.3 Circular Interpolation; G02, G03 Precautions (1) The terms "clockwise" (G02) and "counterclockwise" (G03) used for circular operations are defined as a case where, in a right-hand coordinate system, the negative direction is viewed from the positive direction of the co- ordinate axis which is at right angles to the plane in question.
  • Page 87 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 6 Interpolation Functions 6.3 Circular Interpolation; G02, G03 (c) If the start point radius differs from the end point radius but if the start point angle does not differ from the end point angle, the linear interpolation or spiral interpolation is selected depending on the MTB specifications (pa- rameter "#1278 ext14/bit7").
  • Page 88 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 6 Interpolation Functions 6.4 R Specification Circular Interpolation; G02, G03 6.4 R Specification Circular Interpolation; G02, G03 Function and purpose Along with the conventional circular interpolation commands based on the circular center coordinate (I, K) designa- tion, these commands can also be issued by directly designating the circular radius R.
  • Page 89 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 6 Interpolation Functions 6.4 R Specification Circular Interpolation; G02, G03 Detailed description The circular center is on the bisector line which is perpendicular to the line connecting the start and end points of the circular.
  • Page 90 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 6 Interpolation Functions 6.4 R Specification Circular Interpolation; G02, G03 (Example) #11028 = "0.000 (mm)" Setting value Tolerance value Setting value < 0 0 (Center error will not be interpolated) Setting value = 0 2×minimum setting increment Setting value >...
  • Page 91 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 6 Interpolation Functions 6.5 Plane Selection; G17, G18, G19 6.5 Plane Selection; G17, G18, G19 Function and purpose These commands are used to select the control plane and the plane on which the circular exists. If the 3 basic axes and the parallel axes corresponding to these basic axes are entered as parameters, the com- mands can select the plane composed of any 2 axes which are not parallel axes.
  • Page 92 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 6 Interpolation Functions 6.5 Plane Selection; G17, G18, G19 Parameter entry #1026 to 1028 #1029 to 1031 Basic axes and parallel axes can be entered in the param- Basic axis I, J, K Flat axis I, J, K eters.
  • Page 93 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 6 Interpolation Functions 6.6 Thread Cutting 6.6 Thread Cutting 6.6.1 Constant Lead Thread Cutting; G33 Function and purpose The G33 command exercises feed control over the tool which is synchronized with the spindle rotation and so this makes it possible to conduct constant-lead straight thread-cutting, tapered thread-cutting, and continuous thread- cutting.
  • Page 94 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 6 Interpolation Functions 6.6 Thread Cutting Command format Normal lead thread cutting G33 Z/W__ X/U__ F__ Q__ L__ ; Z, W, X, U End point of thread cutting Lead of long axis (axis which moves most) direction Thread cutting start shift angle (0.000 - 360.000°) Lead axis No.
  • Page 95 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 6 Interpolation Functions 6.6 Thread Cutting Detailed description (1) The E command is also used for the number of ridges in inch thread cutting, and whether the number of ridges or precision lead is to be designated can be selected by parameter setting. (When the parameter "#1229 set01/ bit1"...
  • Page 96 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 6 Interpolation Functions 6.6 Thread Cutting (c) Type 3 (#1265 ext01/bit3 = 1) Inch/metric input Metric input (mm) Inch input (inch) Input unit system B (0.001) C (0.0001) B (0.0001) C (0.0001) Minimum 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001...
  • Page 97 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 6 Interpolation Functions 6.6 Thread Cutting (16) When the mode is switched to the manual mode while G33 is executed, the following block which does not con- tain a thread cutting command is first executed and then the automatic operation stops. In the case of a single block, the following block which does not contain a thread cutting command (G33 mode is cancelled) is first ex- ecuted and then the automatic operation stops.
  • Page 98 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 6 Interpolation Functions 6.6 Thread Cutting Precautions (1) For multiple spindle control II, do not change the "Encoder selection" signal (R2567) during the thread cutting. If it is changed, the thread ridges will lose their shape because the tool cannot be fed at the correct feedrate. Program example 20.0 90.0...
  • Page 99 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 6 Interpolation Functions 6.6 Thread Cutting 6.6.2 Inch Thread Cutting; G33 Function and purpose If the number of ridges per inch in the long axis direction is assigned in the G33 command, the feed of the tool syn- chronized with the spindle rotation will be controlled, which means that constant-lead straight thread-cutting and ta- pered thread-cutting can be performed.
  • Page 100 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 6 Interpolation Functions 6.6 Thread Cutting Program example 20.0 90.0 40.0 50.0 (mm) G33 X90.0 Z40.0 E12.0 ; Absolute command G33 U70.0 W-50.0 E12.0 ; Incremental command IB-1501619-H...
  • Page 101 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 6 Interpolation Functions 6.6 Thread Cutting 6.6.3 Continuous Thread Cutting ; G33 Function and purpose Continuous thread cutting is possible by assigning thread cutting commands continuously. In this way, it is possible to cut special threads whose lead or shape changes. Command format Continuous thread cutting G33 Z__/W__ X__/U__ F__/E__ Q__ L__ ;...
  • Page 102 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 6 Interpolation Functions 6.6 Thread Cutting Detailed description (1) The first thread cutting block in the continuous thread cutting command waits for the spindle's single rotation synchronization signal before starting thread cutting. From the second and following blocks, movement starts without waiting for the spindle's single rotation synchronization command.
  • Page 103 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 6 Interpolation Functions 6.6 Thread Cutting 6.6.4 Variable Lead Thread Cutting; G34 Function and purpose Variable lead thread cutting is enabled by a command specifying a lead increment or decrement amount per turn of the screw.
  • Page 104 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 6 Interpolation Functions 6.6 Thread Cutting Detailed description (1) The command unit is as shown below. (a) Type 1 (#1265 ext01/bit3 = 0, #1271 ext07/bit2 = 0) The lead is designated regardless of the setting of the parameter "#1229 set01/bit1" (Accurate thread cutting E).
  • Page 105 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 6 Interpolation Functions 6.6 Thread Cutting 6.6.5 Circular Thread Cutting; G35,G36 Function and purpose Circular thread cutting making the longitudinal direction the lead is possible. Command format Circular thread cutting Clockwise (CW) G35 X/U__ Z/W__ I__ K__ F/E__ Q__ ; G35 X/U__ Z/W__ R__ F/E__ Q__ ;...
  • Page 106 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 6 Interpolation Functions 6.6 Thread Cutting Detailed description (1) A program error (P33) will occur if the start point and end point match or if the arc center angle is more than 180°. (2) The following will occur if the start point radius and end point radius do not match.
  • Page 107 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 6 Interpolation Functions 6.6 Thread Cutting (8) G36 is used for the two functions, automatic tool length measurement and circular thread cutting (CCW). Which function to be applied depends on the MTB specifications (parameter "#1238 set10/bit0" (switch G36 function)). When "#1238 set10/bit0"...
  • Page 108 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 6 Interpolation Functions 6.6 Thread Cutting Relation with other functions (1) A program error (P113) will occur if the G35/G36 command is issued to an axis not within the plane. (2) Whether dry run is valid or invalid for thread cutting depends on the MTB settings. (When the parameter "#1279 ext15/bit4"...
  • Page 109 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 6 Interpolation Functions 6.6 Thread Cutting 6.6.6 Thread Cutting Override Function and purpose Conventional thread cutting is performed with the spindle override fixed at 100%. By this function, thread cutting feedrate can be changed by changing the spindle override depending on rough cutting, finish machining, etc. The spindle speed during thread cutting is determined with the spindle override at the start of thread cutting.
  • Page 110 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 6 Interpolation Functions 6.6 Thread Cutting Relationship with Other Functions Interlock signal If the start of thread cutting is interlocked, the operations differ depending on the interlock signal. The operation of the interlock signal depends on the MTB specifications. (1) Block start interlock Changing the spindle override while the interlock is active causes the spindle speed to change.
  • Page 111 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 6 Interpolation Functions 6.6 Thread Cutting Precautions (1) Changing the spindle override must be completed before thread cutting is started. Once the spindle override is changed, be sure to wait until the spindle speed is stabilized before starting machining. If the override is changed just before thread cutting is started or machining is started while the spindle speed is unstable, the shift angle of the thread cutting start position will not be correctly compensated for.
  • Page 112 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 6 Interpolation Functions 6.6 Thread Cutting 6.6.7 Variable Feed Thread Cutting Function and purpose This function changes the cutting feedrate by the spindle override at the time of thread cutting. By using this function, the machining condition during thread cutting can be changed. The validity of this function depends on the MTB specifications.
  • Page 113 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 6 Interpolation Functions 6.6 Thread Cutting Cutting feedrates (1) Changing feedrate During thread cutting, the cutting feedrate can be changed by changing the spindle override. Changing the spindle override will change the feedrate. Therefore, if the spindle override is set to "0", the spindle is stopped and feed is stopped.
  • Page 114 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 6 Interpolation Functions 6.6 Thread Cutting Acceleration/deceleration is performed for each step with the acceleration rate calculated based on the specified spindle speed and time constant. If either of them is not specified, the acceleration rate is not calculated, and that step becomes invalid.
  • Page 115 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 6 Interpolation Functions 6.6 Thread Cutting (1) Changeover point when thread cutting is performed singly and when thread cutting is performed continuously At the start of thread cutting, changeover takes place just before the thread cutting command. At the end of thread cutting, it takes place once a tool has been retracted.
  • Page 116 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 6 Interpolation Functions 6.6 Thread Cutting (3) Changeover point for the compound type thread cutting cycle (G76, G76.1, G76.2) In the compound type thread cutting cycle (G76) or multi-part system simultaneous thread cutting cycle (G76.1 or G76.2), thread cutting is performed multiple times with a single command For these cycles, changeover takes place before thread cutting after the tool has approached the programmed position in the initial cycle and after start position return has been performed in the final cycle.
  • Page 117 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 6 Interpolation Functions 6.6 Thread Cutting Precautions (1) Depending on the cutting feed speed, the illegal lead length at the time of thread cutting will change. Because increasing the cutting feedrate causes the illegal lead length to increase, be sure to keep approach distance that is long enough.
  • Page 118 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 6 Interpolation Functions 6.6 Thread Cutting 6.6.8 Thread Cutting Time Constant Function and purpose Usually, incorrect lead parts occur at the start and the end of thread cutting due to the acceleration/deceleration of the NC control axis.
  • Page 119 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 6 Interpolation Functions 6.6 Thread Cutting Relationship with Other Functions Control axis superimposition control This function is invalid for a thread cutting command that is issued during control axis superimposition control. (Op- erated with the superimposition time constant.) Arbitrary axis superimposition control This function is invalid for a thread cutting command that is issued during arbitrary axis superimposition control.
  • Page 120 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 6 Interpolation Functions 6.6 Thread Cutting 6.6.9 Thread Cutting Start Shift Angle Operation Switching Function and purpose When the thread cutting start shift angle is commanded, the thread cutting can be started from the thread cutting start shift angle regardless of whether the Z phase has been passed.
  • Page 121 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 6 Interpolation Functions 6.6 Thread Cutting Precautions (1) This function is available only when the thread cutting encoder pulse is directly input from the spindle drive unit. When the encoder pulse input port of the NC main unit is used, the thread cutting starts from the thread cutting start shift angle after the Z phase has been passed once, regardless of the setting of the parameter "#1260 set32/bit4".
  • Page 122 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 6 Interpolation Functions 6.6 Thread Cutting 6.6.10 Thread Cutting Feed Forward Function and purpose Feed forward control can be performed for the thread cutting command. This can shorten the incomplete thread area. Detailed description (1) Feed forward control is enabled based on the settings of parameters "#2010 fwd_g"...
  • Page 123 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 6 Interpolation Functions 6.6 Thread Cutting [Timing chart] [When this function is not used] G00 X15. G33 Z10. F1.5 G00 X20. Z axis commanded speed Z axis feedback speed [When this function is used] G00 X15.
  • Page 124 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 6 Interpolation Functions 6.6 Thread Cutting Precautions (1) The settings of parameters "#1570 Sfilt2" and "#2010 fwd_g" can be switched using machining condition selec- tion I and parameter input by program. (2) When using this function in multiple part systems, set the same value to the parameter "#1570 Sfilt2" in all part systems.
  • Page 125 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 6 Interpolation Functions 6.7 Helical Interpolation; G02, G03 6.7 Helical Interpolation; G02, G03 Function and purpose When this interpolation is performed with 3 orthogonal axes, the tool will travel helically when circular interpolation is executed for any 2 axes and, at the same time, when another 1 axis is synchronized with the rotation of the circular and linear interpolation is executed synchronously with the rotation of the circular arc.
  • Page 126 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 6 Interpolation Functions 6.7 Helical Interpolation; G02, G03 Command format Helical interpolation command (Specify arc center) G17 G02/G03 X/U_ Y/V_ Z/W_ I_ J_ P_ (,P_) F_ ; G18 G02/G03 Z/W_ X/U_ Y/V_ K_ I_ P_ (,P_) F_ ; G19 G02/G03 Y/V_ Z/W_ X/U_ J_ K_ P_ (,P_) F_ ;...
  • Page 127 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 6 Interpolation Functions 6.7 Helical Interpolation; G02, G03 Detailed description Speed designation during the helical interpolation Speed designation "F" during the helical interpolation has the following types. The available type depends on the MTB specifications.
  • Page 128 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 6 Interpolation Functions 6.7 Helical Interpolation; G02, G03 Number of pitches (S) Start point (E) End point (1) Pitch "L" is obtained with the following expression. P + /2 e - s = tan - tan <...
  • Page 129 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 6 Interpolation Functions 6.7 Helical Interpolation; G02, G03 Relationship with other functions Geometric IB This function can be used together with the Geometric IB function. For details about Geometric IB, refer to "15.5 Geometric IB".
  • Page 130 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 6 Interpolation Functions 6.8 Milling Interpolation; G12.1 6.8 Milling Interpolation; G12.1 Function and purpose When a lathe with linear axes (X, Z axes) and rotary axis (C axis) serving as the control axes is to perform milling at a workpiece end face or in the longitudinal direction of the workpiece, this function uses the hypothetical axis Y which is at right angles to both the X and Z axes to enables the milling shape to be programmed as the X, Y and Z orthog- onal coordinate system commands.
  • Page 131 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 6 Interpolation Functions 6.8 Milling Interpolation; G12.1 Description of address Address Meaning of address Command range (unit) Remarks  If there is no address D, it follows the parameter Selection of milling hy- 0: Y axis pothetical axis name 1: Rotary axis name...
  • Page 132 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 6 Interpolation Functions 6.8 Milling Interpolation; G12.1 Detailed description The following G codes are used to select milling and to set the conditions. G code Function Remarks G12.1 Milling mode ON Default is G13.1 G13.1 Milling mode OFF One of G17, G16, or G19 can be designated as the...
  • Page 133 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 6 Interpolation Functions 6.8 Milling Interpolation; G12.1 6.8.1 Selecting Milling Mode; G12.1 Detailed description (1) The G12.1 and G13.1 commands are used to switch between the turning (G13.1) and milling (G12.1) modes. (2) These commands are modal and the initial mode effective at power ON is the turning mode. (3) The following requirements must be satisfied before a G12.1 command is issued.
  • Page 134 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 6 Interpolation Functions 6.8 Milling Interpolation; G12.1 6.8.2 Milling Interpolation Control and Command Axes Detailed description (1) The two orthogonal linear axes (X and Z axis) and a rotary axis are used as control axes for milling interpolation. The rotation axis is selected with the E command.
  • Page 135 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 6 Interpolation Functions 6.8 Milling Interpolation; G12.1 N3 of program 1 is executed as follows: X = Mill _ X Mill _ X Mill _ X Mill _ X (mm) Current values of (d) 28.284 (diameter value display) 45.000 (Except tool radius compensation amount) (5) Milling interpolation is also available for a two-control-axis system consisting of one linear axis and one rotation...
  • Page 136 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 6 Interpolation Functions 6.8 Milling Interpolation; G12.1 6.8.3 Selecting a Plane during the Milling Mode ; G17,G19,G16 Function and purpose A plane selection command decides the plane on which a tool moves by circular interpolation or tool radius com- pensation in milling mode.
  • Page 137 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 6 Interpolation Functions 6.8 Milling Interpolation; G12.1 Planes to be selected The three planes to be selected are explained below. (1) G16 Y-Z cylindrical plane G16 indicates the plane obtained by developing a cylinder with its bottom radius X. This is useful to process the side face of a workpiece.
  • Page 138 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 6 Interpolation Functions 6.8 Milling Interpolation; G12.1 6.8.4 Setting Milling Coordinate System Function and purpose The coordinate system in a milling mode is set depending on a plane which is selected each time the turning mode (G13.1) is switched to the milling mode by a G12.1 command.
  • Page 139 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 6 Interpolation Functions 6.8 Milling Interpolation; G12.1 G17 and G19 planes (1) For the X and Z axes, the current positions are set as radius value in the coordinate value. (2) The Y axis is fixed as an axis which intersects the X and Z axes at right angles. Y=0 is set in a G12.1 command. Note In the milling mode on the G17 plane, the X axis is operated in the area (positive or negative side) that existed before issuing the G12.1 command.
  • Page 140 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 6 Interpolation Functions 6.8 Milling Interpolation; G12.1 6.8.5 Preparatory Function Detailed description Valid G codes in milling mode Classi- G code Function Classi- G code Function fication fication Positioning Macro call Linear interpolation Macro modal call A Circular interpolation (CW) G66.1...
  • Page 141 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 6 Interpolation Functions 6.8 Milling Interpolation; G12.1 Positioning (G00) If a G00 command is issued in milling mode, positioning is made to the specified point on the selected plane at a rapid traverse rate. G00 X/U__ Y/V__ Z/W__ ;...
  • Page 142 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 6 Interpolation Functions 6.8 Milling Interpolation; G12.1 (2) G17 mode (plane selection X-Y) Program Format G01 X/U__ Y/V__ Z/W__ F__ ; (S) Start point (E) End point (3) G19 mode (plane selection Y-Z) Program Format G01 Y/V__ Z/W__ X/U__ F__ ;...
  • Page 143 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 6 Interpolation Functions 6.8 Milling Interpolation; G12.1 Circular interpolation (G02/G03) If a G02 or G03 command is issued in milling mode, circular interpolation is performed at the specified speed on the selected plane. (1) G16 mode G02/G03 Y/V__ Z/W__ J__ K__ F__ ;...
  • Page 144 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 6 Interpolation Functions 6.8 Milling Interpolation; G12.1 (2) G17 mode G02/G03 X/U__ Y/V__ I__ J__ F__ ; G02/G03 X/U__ Y/V__ R__ F__ ; Circular end point coordinate, X axis (X: absolute position, U: incremental position) Circular end point coordinate, Y axis (Y: absolute position, V: incremental position) Circular center incremental position (incremental position from the start point to the cen- ter)
  • Page 145 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 6 Interpolation Functions 6.8 Milling Interpolation; G12.1 6.8.6 Switching from Milling Mode to Turning Mode; G13.1 Detailed description (1) A G13.1 command is used to cancel the milling mode and return to the turning mode. (2) The G13.1 command is effective if the following requirement is met.
  • Page 146 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 6 Interpolation Functions 6.8 Milling Interpolation; G12.1 6.8.7 Feed Functions Detailed description The synchronous/asynchronous feed mode in the milling mode is the same as for the normal turning mode. To issue the F command in the milling mode, command the speed in the milling coordinate system selected by G16, G17, or G19.
  • Page 147 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 6 Interpolation Functions 6.8 Milling Interpolation; G12.1 6.8.8 Tool Length Compensation Detailed description (1) In milling mode, tool compensation is performed by adding the specified tool length offset amount to the cutting coordinates converted from the milling coordinate system. ●...
  • Page 148 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 6 Interpolation Functions 6.8 Milling Interpolation; G12.1 (2) As can be seen from (1) in previous page, if the specified compensation amount is different from the actual tool length, desired shape will not be obtained. (a) If the compensation amount is larger than tool (b) If the compensation amount is smaller than tool length Example: The actual tool length is 15.0 when...
  • Page 149 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 6 Interpolation Functions 6.8 Milling Interpolation; G12.1 6.8.9 Tool Radius Compensation Function and purpose The workpiece shape can be compensated in the direction of the vector by the radius amount of the tool specified by a G command (G40 to G42) and selected compensation No.
  • Page 150 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 6 Interpolation Functions 6.8 Milling Interpolation; G12.1 6.8.9.1 Tool Radius Compensation Operation Detailed description Tool radius compensation cancel mode The tool radius compensation cancel mode is established by any of the following conditions. (1) While a G12.1 command is effective (2) After the compensation cancel command (G40) is issued In the compensation cancel mode, the compensation vector is 0 and the tool center path matches the programmed...
  • Page 151 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 6 Interpolation Functions 6.8 Milling Interpolation; G12.1 Start operation for tool radius compensation (1) Machining an inside corner Linear -> Linear Linear -> Circular (CP) (S) Start point (CP) Center of arc r : Compensation amount s: Stop point with single block (2) Machining an outside corner (obtuse angle) [90°...
  • Page 152 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 6 Interpolation Functions 6.8 Milling Interpolation; G12.1 (3) Machining an outside corner (acute angle) [θ < 90°] Linear -> Linear (Type A) Linear -> Circular (Type A) (CP) Linear -> Linear (Type B) Linear ->...
  • Page 153 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 6 Interpolation Functions 6.8 Milling Interpolation; G12.1 (1) Machining an outside corner Linear -> Linear (90°<= θ < 180°) Linear -> Linear (0° < θ < 90°) Linear -> Circular (90° <= θ < 180°) Linear ->...
  • Page 154 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 6 Interpolation Functions 6.8 Milling Interpolation; G12.1 (2) Machining an inside corner Linear -> Linear (Obtuse angle) Linear -> Linear (Acute angle) Linear -> Circular (Obtuse angle) Linear -> Circular (Acute angle) (CP) (CP) Circular ->...
  • Page 155 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 6 Interpolation Functions 6.8 Milling Interpolation; G12.1 (3) When the circular end point is not on the circular [Spiral circular command] The area from the arc start point to the end point is interpolated as a spiral arc. [Normal circular command] If the error after compensation is within the parameter value, it is interpolated as a spiral arc.
  • Page 156 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 6 Interpolation Functions 6.8 Milling Interpolation; G12.1 Tool radius compensation cancel operation (1) Machining an inside corner Linear -> Linear Circular -> Linear (CP) (E) End point (CP) Center of arc r : Compensation amount s : Single block stop point Program path Tool center path...
  • Page 157 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 6 Interpolation Functions 6.8 Milling Interpolation; G12.1 (3) Machining an outside corner (acute angle) [θ < 90°] Linear -> Linear (Type A) Circular -> Linear (Type A) (CP) Linear -> Linear (Type B) Circular ->...
  • Page 158 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 6 Interpolation Functions 6.8 Milling Interpolation; G12.1 Changing the compensation direction during tool radius compensation G code Compensation direction Left-side compensation Right-side compensation The compensation direction can be changed by changing the compensation command during the compensation mode without canceling the mode.
  • Page 159 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 6 Interpolation Functions 6.8 Milling Interpolation; G12.1 (3) Circular -> Circular (a) When there is a point of intersection when the compensation direction is changed. (b) When there is no point of intersection when the compensation direction is changed. (CP) (CP) Center of arc (CP)
  • Page 160 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 6 Interpolation Functions 6.8 Milling Interpolation; G12.1 Command for eliminating compensation vectors temporarily When the following command is issued in the compensation mode, the compensation vectors are temporarily elim- inated and then, compensation mode will automatically return. In this case, the compensation is not canceled, and the tool goes directly from the intersection point vector to the point without vectors, in other words, to the programmed command point.
  • Page 161 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 6 Interpolation Functions 6.8 Milling Interpolation; G12.1 (3) Positioning (G00) commands When G00 command is issued, the tool radius compensation is temporarily canceled. N1 G01 X_Y_F_; N5 G01 N1 G01 N2 G00 X_Y_; N2 G00 N4 G00 N3 G00 X_Y_;...
  • Page 162 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 6 Interpolation Functions 6.8 Milling Interpolation; G12.1 Blocks without movement and M commands inhibiting pre-reading The following blocks are known as blocks without movement. M03 ; M command S12 ; S command T45 ; T command G04 X500 ;...
  • Page 163 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 6 Interpolation Functions 6.8 Milling Interpolation; G12.1 (3) Compensation cancel alone (a) G01 precedes the block containing G40: Compensation is canceled by a movement command following G40. (b) G00 precedes the block containing G40: Compensation is canceled by a G00 command before G40. N10 G01 X__ Y__;...
  • Page 164 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 6 Interpolation Functions 6.8 Milling Interpolation; G12.1 6.8.10 Relationship between Milling Interpolation and Other Functions Relationship with other functions Program support functions The following program support functions are valid in milling mode: (1) Linear angle command (2) Variable commands (3) Automatic corner chamfering/corner rounding (4) Geometric function...
  • Page 165 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 6 Interpolation Functions 6.8 Milling Interpolation; G12.1 <Machining program> <Workpiece coordinate> <Machine coordinate> [X axis] [C axis] [X axis] [C axis] G00 X200. C0.; 200. 220. T0101; 200. 220. G12.1; 100. 220. <-The workpiece coordinate system is shifted (without moving the axis) G01 X50.
  • Page 166 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 6 Interpolation Functions 6.8 Milling Interpolation; G12.1 Mirror function (1) Mirror image by external input, mirror image by parameter setting The mirror image by external input or mirror image by parameter setting can be combined with the milling inter- polation for Z axis only.
  • Page 167 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 6 Interpolation Functions 6.9 Cylindrical Interpolation; G07.1 6.9 Cylindrical Interpolation; G07.1 Function and purpose This function develops a shape on the side of a cylinder (shape in a cylindrical coordinate system) into a plane. When the developed shape is programmed as the plane coordinates, it will be converted into a linear axis movement and rotation axis (hypothetical C axis) movement in the original cylindrical coordinates to conduct contour control when machining.
  • Page 168 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 6 Interpolation Functions 6.9 Cylindrical Interpolation; G07.1 Detailed description (1) The cylindrical interpolation is carried out between the rotary axis designated in the G07.1 block and another linear axis. (The following example shows a case in which the rotary axis name is set to "C".) G19 ;...
  • Page 169 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 6 Interpolation Functions 6.9 Cylindrical Interpolation; G07.1 Plane selection The axis used for cylindrical interpolation must be set with the plane selection command. Use parameters (#1029, #1030 and #1031) to set which parallel axis corresponds to the rotary axis. The circular interpolation and tool radius compensation, etc., can be designated on that plane.
  • Page 170 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 6 Interpolation Functions 6.9 Cylindrical Interpolation; G07.1 Program example <Program> N01 G28 XZC ; N02 T0202 F500 ; N03 G97 S100 M23 ; N04 G00 X50. Z0. ; N05 G94 G01 X40. F100. ; N06 G19 C0 Z0 ;...
  • Page 171 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 6 Interpolation Functions 6.9 Cylindrical Interpolation; G07.1 Relationship with other functions Circular interpolation (1) Circular interpolation between the rotary axis and linear axis is possible during the cylindrical interpolation mode. (2) Only the R specification command (mm/inch) is available for circular interpolation. (I, J and K cannot be desig- nated.) (3) An arc is drawn on the developed surface of the cylinder in the circular interpolation, thus the calculation is per- formed with the C axis unit in millimeters (mm).
  • Page 172 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 6 Interpolation Functions 6.9 Cylindrical Interpolation; G07.1 Tool length compensation (1) Issue the T command before starting cylindrical interpolation. Program error (P485) will occur if T command is issued in the cylindrical interpolation mode. T1212 ;...
  • Page 173 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 6 Interpolation Functions 6.9 Cylindrical Interpolation; G07.1 (2) When the synchronous feed is valid (#1293 ext29/bit0 = 1): Both the synchronous feed and asynchronous feed are valid during the cylindrical interpolation mode. The feed mode and feedrate remain unchanged and take over the previous state when the cylindrical interpola- tion mode is started or canceled.
  • Page 174 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 6 Interpolation Functions 6.9 Cylindrical Interpolation; G07.1 Cylindrical interpolation function: Combinations of G code commands The table below shows whether G codes are available during the cylindrical interpolation mode (G07.1). ○: This function is available during the cylindrical interpolation mode. Δ: This function is available, however, it is partially restricted.
  • Page 175 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 6 Interpolation Functions 6.9 Cylindrical Interpolation; G07.1 Group G code (G code list: 3) Availability G140 × (P501) G141 × (P501) G142 × (P501) G144 ○ G145 ○ G156 × (*2) ○ ○ ○...
  • Page 176 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 6 Interpolation Functions 6.9 Cylindrical Interpolation; G07.1 Group G code (G code list: 3) Availability × (P204/P481) × (P481) × (P481) × (P481) × (P481) × (P481) × (P481) G76.1 × (P210) G76.2 ×...
  • Page 177 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 6 Interpolation Functions 6.9 Cylindrical Interpolation; G07.1 Group G code (G code list: 3) Availability × (P481) ○ × (P481) × (P481) - (G07.1/G107(*)) Δ (*5) - (G12.1/G112(*)) × (P481) - (G13.1/G113(*)) × (P481) G43.1 ×...
  • Page 178 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 6 Interpolation Functions 6.10 Polar Coordinate Interpolation; G12.1, G13.1/G112, G113 (Only 6 or 7 in G Code List) 6.10 Polar Coordinate Interpolation; G12.1, G13.1/G112, G113 (Only 6 or 7 in G Code List) Function and purpose This function converts the commands programmed with the orthogonal coordinate axis into linear axis movement (tool movement) and rotary axis movement (workpiece rotation), and controls the contour.
  • Page 179 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 6 Interpolation Functions 6.10 Polar Coordinate Interpolation; G12.1, G13.1/G112, G113 (Only 6 or 7 in G Code List) Command format Polar coordinate interpolation mode start G12.1 E = __ ; Designation of rotary axis for polar coordinate interpolation (name-extended axis (2-char- acter axis) can be set.) Polar coordinate interpolation mode cancel G13.1 ;...
  • Page 180 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 6 Interpolation Functions 6.10 Polar Coordinate Interpolation; G12.1, G13.1/G112, G113 (Only 6 or 7 in G Code List) Detailed description (1) The coordinate commands in the interval from the start to cancellation of the polar coordinate interpolation mode is the polar coordinate interpolation.
  • Page 181 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 6 Interpolation Functions 6.10 Polar Coordinate Interpolation; G12.1, G13.1/G112, G113 (Only 6 or 7 in G Code List) Program commands during polar coordinate interpolation (1) The program commands in the polar coordinate interpolation mode are issued by the orthogonal coordinate val- ue of the linear axis and rotary axis (hypothetical axis) on the polar coordinate interpolation plane.
  • Page 182 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 6 Interpolation Functions 6.10 Polar Coordinate Interpolation; G12.1, G13.1/G112, G113 (Only 6 or 7 in G Code List) Program example Hypothetical C axis Hypothetical C axis Tool Path after tool radius compensation Programmed path <Program>...
  • Page 183 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 6 Interpolation Functions 6.10 Polar Coordinate Interpolation; G12.1, G13.1/G112, G113 (Only 6 or 7 in G Code List) Relationship with other functions Circular interpolation on polar coordinate interpolation plane The arc radius address for carrying out circular interpolation during the polar coordinate interpolation mode is deter- mined with the polar coordinate interpolation plane.
  • Page 184 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 6 Interpolation Functions 6.10 Polar Coordinate Interpolation; G12.1, G13.1/G112, G113 (Only 6 or 7 in G Code List) Feed mode and F command before and after polar coordinate interpolation mode Operations vary depending on whether the synchronous feed during polar coordinate interpolation is valid or invalid. Whether the synchronous feed is valid or invalid depends on the MTB specifications (parameter "#1293 ext29/bit0").
  • Page 185 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 6 Interpolation Functions 6.10 Polar Coordinate Interpolation; G12.1, G13.1/G112, G113 (Only 6 or 7 in G Code List) Operation switching for circular interpolation in the center of a workpiece In circular interpolation that passes through the center of the workpiece, a large movement occurs on the C axis when the axis passes through the center of the workpiece.
  • Page 186 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 6 Interpolation Functions 6.10 Polar Coordinate Interpolation; G12.1, G13.1/G112, G113 (Only 6 or 7 in G Code List) Axis name extension (1) When the rotary axis specified with the address "E" or the parameter "#1516 mill_ax" is the name-extended axis (2-character axis), the name-extended axis (2-character axis) can be used as a hypothetical axis name.
  • Page 187 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 6 Interpolation Functions 6.10 Polar Coordinate Interpolation; G12.1, G13.1/G112, G113 (Only 6 or 7 in G Code List) G code that can be used during the polar coordinate interpolation mode G code Details Positioning Linear interpolation Circular interpolation (CW)
  • Page 188 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 6 Interpolation Functions 6.10 Polar Coordinate Interpolation; G12.1, G13.1/G112, G113 (Only 6 or 7 in G Code List) Restrictions and precautions (1) Program cannot be restarted (program restart) when the block is in the polar coordinate interpolation. (2) The program error (P486) occurs if the polar coordinate interpolation command is issued during the mirror image.
  • Page 189 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 6 Interpolation Functions 6.11 Exponential Interpolation; G02.3, G03.3 6.11 Exponential Interpolation; G02.3, G03.3 Function and purpose Exponential function interpolation changes the rotary axis into an exponential function shape in respect to the linear axis movement.
  • Page 190 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 6 Interpolation Functions 6.11 Exponential Interpolation; G02.3, G03.3 Command format Forward rotation interpolation (Modal) G02.3 X__ Y__ Z__ I__ J__ R__ F__ Q__ K__ ; Backward rotation interpolation (Modal) G03.3 X__ Y__ Z__ I__ J__ R__ F__ Q__ K__ ; X axis end point (*1) Y axis end point (*1) Z axis end point (*1)
  • Page 191 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 6 Interpolation Functions 6.11 Exponential Interpolation; G02.3, G03.3 (*5) The command unit and command range is the same as the normal F code. Command the composite feedrate that includes the rotary axis. The normal F modal value will not change by the address Q command. The axis will interpolate between the initial speed (F) and end speed (Q) in the CNC according to the linear axis.
  • Page 192 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 6 Interpolation Functions 6.11 Exponential Interpolation; G02.3, G03.3 Machining example [Uniform helix machining of taper shape] <Relational expression of exponential function in machining example> θ/D Z(θ) = r1 *(e -1)* tan(p1) / tan(i1) + z0 θ/D X(θ) = r1 *(e -1)/ tan(i1)
  • Page 193 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 6 Interpolation Functions 6.11 Exponential Interpolation; G02.3, G03.3 According to expressions (1) and (2), expression (3) is obtained. Z(θ) = X(θ) * tan(p1) + z0 ...(3) According to expression (3), the slot base gradient angle (p1) is set from the X axis and Z axis end point positions (x1, z1).
  • Page 194 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 6 Interpolation Functions 6.11 Exponential Interpolation; G02.3, G03.3 Command and operation (1) G02.3 (equivalent to G03.3 if j1 < 0) In the conditional figure below, the upper side shows a command, and the lower side shows an operation. X movement direction >...
  • Page 195 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 6 Interpolation Functions 6.11 Exponential Interpolation; G02.3, G03.3 Precautions (1) When G02.3/G03.3 is commanded, interpolation takes place with the exponential function relational expression using the start position of the linear axis and rotary axis as "0". (2) Linear interpolation will take place in the following cases, even if in the G02.3/G03.3 mode.
  • Page 196 Feed Functions IB-1501619-H...
  • Page 197 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 7 Feed Functions 7.1 Rapid Traverse Rate 7Feed Functions 7.1 Rapid Traverse Rate 7.1.1 Rapid Traverse Rate Function and purpose The rapid traverse rate is set in the parameters for each axis. During high-accuracy control mode, the dedicated rapid traverse rate (parameter) is applied. Override can be applied to the rapid traverse rate using the external signal supplied.
  • Page 198 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 7 Feed Functions 7.1 Rapid Traverse Rate 7.1.2 G00 Feedrate Command (,F Command) Function and purpose Use this function to specify G00 (positioning command) and an axis feedrate in G00 mode. The speed of tool exchange, axis movement of gantry, etc. can be specified with the machining program so that the mechanical vibration can be suppressed.
  • Page 199 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 7 Feed Functions 7.1 Rapid Traverse Rate (6) The ",F" command is clamped by the rapid traverse rate set by the axis specification parameter. (*1) Feedrate clamping depends on the setting of parameter "#1086 G0Intp". "#1086 G0Intp"...
  • Page 200 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 7 Feed Functions 7.1 Rapid Traverse Rate Relationship with Other Functions Rapid traverse constant-gradient acceleration/deceleration When ",F" is specified, constant-gradient acceleration/deceleration control is applied to the feedrate specified by ",F". The feedrate (vertical axis in the figure below) varies depending on whether or not the ",F" command has been is- sued.
  • Page 201 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 7 Feed Functions 7.1 Rapid Traverse Rate Control axis superimposition (G126) Clamping of the ",F" command is performed according to the rapid traverse rate parameters that are selected de- pending on the direction and mode in which a superimposition related axis moves (rapid traverse rate during super- imposition control (#2090 plrapid), rapid traverse rate 2 during superimposition control (#2621 plrapid2), rapid traverse rate during 3-axis tandem superimposition control (#2626 pl3rapid2), rapid traverse rate 2 during 3-axis tan- dem superimposition control (#2627 pl3rapid2), and rapid traverse rate 3 during 3-axis tandem superimposition con-...
  • Page 202 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 7 Feed Functions 7.2 Cutting Feedrate 7.2 Cutting Feedrate Function and purpose This function specifies the feedrate of the cutting commands, and a feed amount per spindle rotation or feed amount per minute is commanded. Once commanded, it is stored in the memory as a modal value. The feedrate modal is cleared to zero only when the power is turned ON.
  • Page 203 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 7 Feed Functions 7.3 F1-digit Feed 7.3 F1-digit Feed Function and purpose By setting the F1-digit feed parameter, the feedrate which has been set to correspond to the 1-digit number following the F address serves as the command value. When F0 is assigned, the rapid traverse rate is established and the speed is the same as for G00.
  • Page 204 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 7 Feed Functions 7.3 F1-digit Feed Precautions (1) F1 to F5 are invalid in the G00 mode and the rapid traverse rate is established instead. (2) If F0 is used in the G02, G03, G02.1 or G03.1 mode, the program error (P121) will occur. The error will be elim- inated if the F0 command is rewritten.
  • Page 205 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 7 Feed Functions 7.4 Feed Per Minute/Feed Per Revolution (Asynchronous Feed/Synchronous Feed); G94, G95 7.4 Feed Per Minute/Feed Per Revolution (Asynchronous Feed/ Synchronous Feed); G94, G95 Function and purpose Feed per minute (asynchronous feed) By issuing the G94 command, the commands from that block are issued directly by the numerical value following F as the feedrate per minute (mm/min, inch/min).
  • Page 206 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 7 Feed Functions 7.4 Feed Per Minute/Feed Per Revolution (Asynchronous Feed/Synchronous Feed); G94, G95 Inch input Input Setting unit B (0.0001 inch) C (0.00001 inch) Command Mode Feed per minute Feed per revolution Feed per minute Feed per revolution Command Address...
  • Page 207 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 7 Feed Functions 7.5 Feedrate Designation and Effects on Control Axes 7.5 Feedrate Designation and Effects on Control Axes Function and purpose It has already been mentioned that a machine has a number of control axes. These control axes can be divided into linear axes which control linear movement and rotary axes which control rotary movement.
  • Page 208 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 7 Feed Functions 7.5 Feedrate Designation and Effects on Control Axes Detailed description When controlling linear axes Even when only one machine axis is to be controlled or there are two or more axes to be controlled simultaneously, the feedrate which is assigned by the F code functions as a linear speed in the tool advance direction.
  • Page 209 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 7 Feed Functions 7.5 Feedrate Designation and Effects on Control Axes When controlling rotary axes When rotary axes are to be controlled, the designated feedrate functions as the rotary speed of the rotary axes or, in other words, as an angular speed.
  • Page 210 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 7 Feed Functions 7.5 Feedrate Designation and Effects on Control Axes When linear and rotary axes are to be controlled at the same time The controller proceeds in exactly the same way whether linear or rotary axes are to be controlled. When a rotary axis is to be controlled, the numerical value assigned by the coordinate word (C, H) is the angle and the numerical values assigned by the feedrate (F) are all handled as linear speeds.
  • Page 211 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 7 Feed Functions 7.5 Feedrate Designation and Effects on Control Axes The combined speed "ft" according to (1), (2), (3), (4) and (5) is as follows: ft = + fty π π π × r × c - x ×...
  • Page 212 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 7 Feed Functions 7.6 Thread Cutting Mode 7.6 Thread Cutting Mode Function and purpose F command or E commands for thread leads can be issued for the thread cutting mode (G33, G34, G76 G78 com- mands).
  • Page 213 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 7 Feed Functions 7.7 Automatic Acceleration/Deceleration after Interpolation 7.7 Automatic Acceleration/Deceleration after Interpolation Function and purpose Acceleration/deceleration is applied to axis traverse automatically. There are four types of acceleration/deceleration patterns: linear acceleration/deceleration, primary delay acceleration/deceleration, exponential acceleration-linear deceleration, and soft acceleration/deceleration.
  • Page 214 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 7 Feed Functions 7.7 Automatic Acceleration/Deceleration after Interpolation Note (1) The rapid traverse feed acceleration/deceleration patterns are effective for the following: G00, G27, G28, G29, G30, rapid traverse feed in manual run, JOG feed, incremental feed, return to referencepo- sition.
  • Page 215 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 7 Feed Functions 7.7 Automatic Acceleration/Deceleration after Interpolation (3) Use the rapid traverse time constant changeover request signal to switch the rapid traverse time constant. The operations via PLC signals and the settings of related parameters depend on the MTB specifications. Basic rapid Rapid traverse Basic rapid...
  • Page 216 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 7 Feed Functions 7.7 Automatic Acceleration/Deceleration after Interpolation [Operation examples] Rapid traverse time constant switching 1 ( turn on the rapid traverse time constant changeover request signal during the axis travel.) Rapid traverse time constant changeover request signal Machining program G00 X200.
  • Page 217 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 7 Feed Functions 7.7 Automatic Acceleration/Deceleration after Interpolation Precautions (1) When the time constant < 2nd step time constant under the soft acceleration/deceleration, the feedrate pattern of the time constant and 2nd step time constant are interchanged. IB-1501619-H...
  • Page 218 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 7 Feed Functions 7.8 Rapid Traverse Constant-gradient Acceleration/Deceleration 7.8 Rapid Traverse Constant-gradient Acceleration/Deceleration Function and purpose This function performs acceleration and deceleration at a constant gradient during linear acceleration/deceleration in the rapid traverse mode. The constant-gradient acceleration/deceleration method can be more beneficial in re- ducing cycle time in comparison to the acceleration/deceleration with fixed time constant method.
  • Page 219 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 7 Feed Functions 7.8 Rapid Traverse Constant-gradient Acceleration/Deceleration When the interpolation distance is so short that the rapid traverse rate is not achieved (1) Acceleration/deceleration with fixed time constant: The gradient is determined by the rapid traverse rate; however, the cycle time is determined by the time constant, and the reaching speed is slower than constant-gradient acceleration/deceleration.
  • Page 220 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 7 Feed Functions 7.8 Rapid Traverse Constant-gradient Acceleration/Deceleration 2-axis simultaneous interpolation (When linear interpolation is used, Tsx < Tsz, Lx ≠ Lz) (1) Determination of deceleration check time for 2-axis interpolation The time required for the command deceleration check during rapid traverse constant-gradient acceleration/de- celeration is the longest one among the deceleration check times of the axes which are commanded simultane- ously.
  • Page 221 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 7 Feed Functions 7.8 Rapid Traverse Constant-gradient Acceleration/Deceleration When the interpolation distance is so short that the acceleration/deceleration time is shorter than the mini- mum time constant for constant-gradient acceleration/deceleration If a minimum time constant for constant-gradient acceleration/deceleration has been set in the parameter, ac- celeration/deceleration speed is adjusted to prevent the acceleration/deceleration time to reach the speed cal- culated by interpolation distance from going below the minimum time constant.
  • Page 222 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 7 Feed Functions 7.8 Rapid Traverse Constant-gradient Acceleration/Deceleration Relationship with other functions (1) The constant-gradient acceleration/deceleration during dry run is disabled. When the constant-gradient acceleration/deceleration is valid and the speed is changed by dry run during axis traveling, dry run is disabled in the currently executed block, and the constant-gradient acceleration/deceleration is performed at the same speed as before.
  • Page 223 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 7 Feed Functions 7.8 Rapid Traverse Constant-gradient Acceleration/Deceleration (2) The acceleration/deceleration method varies depending on the parameter setting (depending on the MTB spec- ifications). #1752 #1200 #1086 Specified mode (*1) Unspecified mode cfgPR02/bit2 Constant-time acceleration/ deceleration method Constant-gradient acceler-...
  • Page 224 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 7 Feed Functions 7.9 Cutting Feed Constant-gradient Acceleration/Deceleration 7.9 Cutting Feed Constant-gradient Acceleration/Deceleration Function and purpose This function performs linear acceleration/deceleration at a constant inclination in the cutting feed mode. The con- stant-gradient acceleration/deceleration method can be more beneficial in reducing cycle time in comparison to the acceleration/deceleration with fixed time constant method.
  • Page 225 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 7 Feed Functions 7.9 Cutting Feed Constant-gradient Acceleration/Deceleration (3) The acceleration/deceleration patterns in the case where cutting feed constant-gradient acceleration/decelera- tion is performed are as follows. [When the interpolation distance is long enough for the cutting feedrate to be achieved] (a) Acceleration/deceleration with fixed time constant: clamp θ1...
  • Page 226 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 7 Feed Functions 7.9 Cutting Feed Constant-gradient Acceleration/Deceleration [When the interpolation distance is so short that the cutting feedrate is not achieved] The acceleration/deceleration gradient is determined by the maximum cutting feedrate. clamp ×...
  • Page 227 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 7 Feed Functions 7.9 Cutting Feed Constant-gradient Acceleration/Deceleration [2-axis simultaneous interpolation (When Tsx < Tsz, Lx ≠ Lz)] When multi-axis simultaneous interpolation is performed during linear interpolation constant-gradient accelera- tion/deceleration, the longest one among the acceleration/deceleration times of all axes is applied to the other axes which were commanded simultaneously.
  • Page 228 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 7 Feed Functions 7.9 Cutting Feed Constant-gradient Acceleration/Deceleration [When the feedrate is so low that the acceleration/deceleration time is shorter than the minimum time constant for constant-gradient acceleration/deceleration] Acceleration/deceleration speed is adjusted to prevent the acceleration/deceleration time calculated by the cut- ting feedrate from going below the minimum time constant.
  • Page 229 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 7 Feed Functions 7.9 Cutting Feed Constant-gradient Acceleration/Deceleration Relationship with other functions (1) The constant-gradient acceleration/deceleration during dry run is disabled. When the constant-gradient acceleration/deceleration is valid and the speed is changed by dry run during axis traveling, dry run is disabled in the currently executed block, and the constant-gradient acceleration/deceleration is performed at the same speed as before.
  • Page 230 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 7 Feed Functions 7.9 Cutting Feed Constant-gradient Acceleration/Deceleration (2) The constant-gradient acceleration/deceleration is valid for the linear interpolation command in the fixed cycle. However, the constant-gradient acceleration/deceleration for linear interpolation is invalid for the linear interpo- lation command in the synchronous tapping cycle.
  • Page 231 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 7 Feed Functions 7.9 Cutting Feed Constant-gradient Acceleration/Deceleration Restrictions (1) When the linear interpolation command is continuously executed in two or more blocks for the same axis during constant-gradient acceleration/deceleration for linear interpolation, processing of the 3rd block is started after the deceleration processing of the 1st block was completed.
  • Page 232 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 7 Feed Functions 7.10 Speed Clamp 7.10 Speed Clamp Function and purpose This function exercises control over the actual cutting feedrate in which override has been applied to the cutting fee- drate command so that the speed clamp value which has been preset independently for each axis is not exceeded. Note (1) Speed clamping is not applied to synchronous feed and thread cutting.
  • Page 233 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 7 Feed Functions 7.11 Exact Stop Check; G09 7.11 Exact Stop Check; G09 Function and purpose In order to prevent roundness during corner cutting and machine shock when the tool feedrate changes suddenly, there are times when it is desirable to start the commands in the following block once the in-position state after the machine has decelerated and stopped or the elapsing of the deceleration check time has been checked.
  • Page 234 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 7 Feed Functions 7.11 Exact Stop Check; G09 Detailed description [With continuous cutting feed] G00 Xx2; G00 Xx1; [With cutting feed in-position check] G00 Xx2; G00 Xx1; Ts : Cutting feed acceleration/deceleration time constant In-position width The in-position width, as shown in the figure above, is the remaining distance (shaded area in the above figure) of the previous block when the next block is started is set in the servo parameter "#2224 sv024".
  • Page 235 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 7 Feed Functions 7.11 Exact Stop Check; G09 With deceleration check (1) With linear acceleration/deceleration G00 Xx1; G00 Xx2; Ts: Acceleration/deceleration time Td: Deceleration check time Td = Ts + α (0 to 10ms) constant (2) With exponential acceleration/deceleration G00 Xx1;...
  • Page 236 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 7 Feed Functions 7.11 Exact Stop Check; G09 Program example N001 G09 G01 X100.000 F150 ; The commands in the following block are started once the deceleration check time or in-position state has been checked after the machine has decelerated and stopped.
  • Page 237 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 7 Feed Functions 7.12 Exact Stop Check Mode; G61 7.12 Exact Stop Check Mode; G61 Function and purpose Whereas the G09 exact stop check command checks the in-position status only for the block in which the command has been assigned, the G61 command functions as a modal.
  • Page 238 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 7 Feed Functions 7.13 Deceleration Check 7.13 Deceleration Check 7.13.1 Deceleration Check Function and purpose The deceleration check reduces the machine shock that occurs when the control axis feedrate is suddenly changed and prevents corners from becoming rounded. This is accomplished by decelerating the motor to a stop at axis movement block joints before the next block is executed.
  • Page 239 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 7 Feed Functions 7.13 Deceleration Check Detailed description Behavior for each combination of movement commands Next block Current block G00/G01 without move- ment ○ (○) (1)(2) × ○ (○) (1)(3) × Others ○ (○) (1) ×...
  • Page 240 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 7 Feed Functions 7.13 Deceleration Check Selecting deceleration checks (MTB specifications) (1) When a rapid traverse command (G00/G53) block is to be executed Parameters Deceleration check method Conditions of deceleration check #1193 inpos Command deceleration check meth- Deceleration check time has elapsed.
  • Page 241 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 7 Feed Functions 7.13 Deceleration Check Command deceleration check method Execution of the next block starts after confirming that the deceleration of the command system is completed upon completion of interpolation for one block. The following explains an example of transition from the current block (rapid traverse) to the next block.
  • Page 242 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 7 Feed Functions 7.13 Deceleration Check Smoothing check method Execution of the next block starts after the command deceleration check is performed and after confirming that the smoothing for all axes in the part system has reached zero. For exponential acceleration/deceleration Command Execution block...
  • Page 243 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 7 Feed Functions 7.13 Deceleration Check The purpose of the deceleration check is to minimize the positioning time. The bigger the setting value for the in- position width, the shorter the time is, but the remaining distance of the previous block at the start of the next block also becomes larger, and this could become an obstacle in the actual processing work.
  • Page 244 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 7 Feed Functions 7.13 Deceleration Check Programmable in-position width command This command commands the in-position width for the positioning command from the machining program. G00 X__ Z__ Y__ ,I__ ; X, Z, Y Positioning coordinate value of each axis In-position width (setting range: 1 to 999999) Execution of the next block starts after confirming that the position error amount in the block in which the decelera-...
  • Page 245 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 7 Feed Functions 7.13 Deceleration Check Relationship with Other Functions Tool compensation The deceleration check acts on the compensated block when tool compensation is performed. Control axis synchronization between part systems (G125), Control axis superimposition (G126), Arbitrary axis exchange (G140), Arbitrary axis superimposition (G156) When control axis synchronization between part systems (G125), control axis superimposition (G126), arbitrary axis exchange (G140), or arbitrary axis superimposition (G156) takes place in another part system, in a cutting block for...
  • Page 246 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 7 Feed Functions 7.13 Deceleration Check 7.13.2 Deceleration Check When Movement in the Opposite Direction Is Reversed Function and purpose A deceleration check cannot be designated for G01 -> G00 or G01 -> G01, but it can be designated in the following manner only when the movement reverses to the opposite direction in successive blocks.
  • Page 247 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 7 Feed Functions 7.13 Deceleration Check Same direction Opposite direction #1502 = 1 Command deceleration Enlarged figure (a) Commanded speed (b) Resultant speed (c) Command deceleration is completed. Example of program: When there is a deceleration check in the movement of several axes G91 G01 X100.
  • Page 248 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 7 Feed Functions 7.13 Deceleration Check Designating deceleration check for G01 -> G01 opposite direction movement reversal If the axis movement reverses to the opposite direction in a G01 to G01 successive block, the deceleration check for the movement in the opposite direction can be changed with the MTB specifications (parameter "#1503 G1Ipfg").
  • Page 249 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 7 Feed Functions 7.14 Rapid Traverse Block Overlap; G0.5 P1 7.14 Rapid Traverse Block Overlap; G0.5 P1 Function and purpose This function enables the next block to start (overlap) without waiting for positioning (G00) or reference position re- turn (G28/G30).
  • Page 250 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 7 Feed Functions 7.14 Rapid Traverse Block Overlap; G0.5 P1 Deceleration check method using in-position width For a deceleration check method that uses the in-position width for rapid traverse (G00) or reference position return (G28/G30), a function with a higher priority that is enabled will be applied.
  • Page 251 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 7 Feed Functions 7.14 Rapid Traverse Block Overlap; G0.5 P1 7.14.1 Rapid Traverse Block Overlap for G00; G0.5 Function and purpose This function enables the next block to start (overlap) without waiting for the deceleration completion at the joint be- tween blocks in the G00-G00 command, G00-G01 command and G01-G00 command (*1).
  • Page 252 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 7 Feed Functions 7.14 Rapid Traverse Block Overlap; G0.5 P1 (6) If an address is omitted, the width determined by the MTB specifications becomes valid. (Parameters "#2224 SV024" and "#13024 SP024") If a value less than the width determined by the MTB is specified, that width becomes valid. (7) If address J or K is set to "0", the conventional deceleration check is performed.
  • Page 253 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 7 Feed Functions 7.14 Rapid Traverse Block Overlap; G0.5 P1 <Note> When executing a rapid traverse block overlap in G00 multi-step acceleration/deceleration, the next block (N2 in the following program) will be started after the deceleration at the last step in the execution block (N1) has started.
  • Page 254 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 7 Feed Functions 7.14 Rapid Traverse Block Overlap; G0.5 P1 Adjustment of start position of overlap The start position of overlap when a rapid traverse block overlap for G00 is executed can be adjusted with the in- position width.
  • Page 255 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 7 Feed Functions 7.14 Rapid Traverse Block Overlap; G0.5 P1 The in-position width is determined by the G code address or parameter value. (1) When specifying the in-position width with a G code, the one specified with address J/K becomes effective. Note that if address J or K is set to "0", the rapid traverse block overlap is disabled.
  • Page 256 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 7 Feed Functions 7.14 Rapid Traverse Block Overlap; G0.5 P1 Program example When the in-position width is specified with address J (G0.5P1 J_) The following are examples of using G00 rapid traverse block overlap in combination with G00 (rapid traverse) and G01 (cutting feed).
  • Page 257 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 7 Feed Functions 7.14 Rapid Traverse Block Overlap; G0.5 P1 Example behavior in fixed cycle When specifying G00 (positioning) -> G84 (tapping cycle) (Main program) (G84 program) N10 G0.5 P1; (Same for N40 block) N20 G91 G98 G64 G00 Z-25.;...
  • Page 258 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 7 Feed Functions 7.14 Rapid Traverse Block Overlap; G0.5 P1 Relationship with Other Functions Programmable in-position If an ",I" address command is used to specify the in-position width from the program when the rapid traverse block overlap is enabled, the in-position width of programmable in-position is given priority.
  • Page 259 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 7 Feed Functions 7.14 Rapid Traverse Block Overlap; G0.5 P1 Deceleration Check When the rapid traverse block overlap is enabled, the conventional deceleration check is disabled for the behavior subject to this function. When the rapid traverse block overlap is disabled, the conventional deceleration check is enabled.
  • Page 260 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 7 Feed Functions 7.14 Rapid Traverse Block Overlap; G0.5 P1 Tool compensation In the block where the compensation amount of the tool compensation function below is changed, rapid traverse block overlap is not performed at either of the start point or the end point. Tool length offset Tool radius compensation 3-dimensional tool radius compensation...
  • Page 261 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 7 Feed Functions 7.14 Rapid Traverse Block Overlap; G0.5 P1 Precautions (1) When a block without a movement command is inserted between blocks (N1 and N2) that are subject to the rapid traverse block overlap, whether to perform the rapid traverse block overlap depends on the acceleration/decel- eration mode of the N1 block.
  • Page 262 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 7 Feed Functions 7.14 Rapid Traverse Block Overlap; G0.5 P1 7.14.2 Rapid Traverse Block Overlap for G28 Function and purpose This function enables the next block to start (overlap) without waiting for the deceleration completion at the joint be- tween blocks in the G00-G28/G30 command or at the intermediate point of G28/G30.
  • Page 263 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 7 Feed Functions 7.14 Rapid Traverse Block Overlap; G0.5 P1 Program example The following are examples of using rapid traverse block overlap for G28 in combination with G28/G30 (reference position return) and G00 (rapid traverse). Parameter setting X axis Z axis...
  • Page 264 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 7 Feed Functions 7.15 Automatic Corner Override 7.15 Automatic Corner Override Function and purpose When cutting with nose radius compensation, to prevent machining surface distortion due to the increase in the cut- ting load when cutting corners, this command automatically applies an override on the cutting feedrate so that the cutting amount is not increased for a set time at the automatic corner R.
  • Page 265 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 7 Feed Functions 7.15 Automatic Corner Override [Parameter setting] The following parameters are set into the machining parameters. Refer to the Instruction Manual for details on the setting method. Parameters Setting range #8007 Override 0 to 100 (%) #8008...
  • Page 266 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 7 Feed Functions 7.15 Automatic Corner Override Application example The lines in the figure denote: Programmed path Nose R center Arc (inside offset) (1) Linear - linear corner The override set in the parameter (#8007) is applied in the deceleration range Ci. (2) Linear - arc (outside offset) corner The override set in the parameter (#8007) is applied in the deceleration range Ci.
  • Page 267 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 7 Feed Functions 7.15 Automatic Corner Override (4) Linear - arc (inside offset) corner For straight lines, the override set in the parameter (#8007) is applied in the deceleration range Ci. (5) Arc (inside offset) - linear corner The override set in the parameter (#8007) is applied in the deceleration range Ci.
  • Page 268 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 7 Feed Functions 7.15 Automatic Corner Override Relationship with other functions Function Operation of automatic corner override (G62) F1-digit Feed Automatic corner override is applied to the F1-digit speed. Cutting feed override Cutting feed override is applied to automatic corner override. Override cancel Automatic corner override will not be canceled by override cancel.
  • Page 269 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 7 Feed Functions 7.15 Automatic Corner Override Precautions (1) Automatic corner override (G62) is valid only in the G01, G02, and G03 modes; it is not effective in the G00 mode. When switching from the G00 mode to the G01 (or G02 or G03) mode at a corner (or vice versa), automatic corner override will not be applied at that corner in the G00 block.
  • Page 270 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 7 Feed Functions 7.16 Tapping Mode; G63 7.16 Tapping Mode; G63 Function and purpose The G63 command allows the control mode best suited for tapping to be entered, as indicated below: (1) Cutting override is fixed at 100%. (2) Deceleration commands at joints between blocks are invalid.
  • Page 271 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 7 Feed Functions 7.17 Cutting Mode; G64 7.17 Cutting Mode; G64 Function and purpose The G64 command allows the cutting mode in which smooth cutting surfaces are obtained to be established. Unlike the exact stop check mode (G61), the next block is executed continuously with the machine not decelerating and stopping between cutting feed blocks in this mode.
  • Page 272 Dwell IB-1501619-H...
  • Page 273 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 8 Dwell 8.1 Dwell (Time-based Designation); G04 8Dwell 8.1 Dwell (Time-based Designation); G04 Function and purpose The machine movement is temporarily stopped by the program command to make the waiting time state. Therefore, the start of the next block can be delayed.
  • Page 274 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 8 Dwell 8.1 Dwell (Time-based Designation); G04 (4) If any of the following conditions is met, the dwell time unit commanded by "P" is "ms"; however, the setting unit can be changed with the parameter "#19014 G04 P factor". "#8112 DECIMAL PNT-P"...
  • Page 275 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 8 Dwell 8.1 Dwell (Time-based Designation); G04 Program example Here is a program example which satisfies the following conditions. #100 = 1000 ; The parameter "#19014 G04 P factor" is set to "0". Command Dwell time [s] #1078 = 0...
  • Page 276 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 8 Dwell 8.2 Dwell (Revolution-based Designation); G04 8.2 Dwell (Revolution-based Designation); G04 Function and purpose The machine movement is temporarily stopped by the program command to make the waiting time state. Therefore, the start of the next block can be delayed. The waiting time state can be canceled by inputting the skip signal. This chapter describes the dwell (revolution-based designation) function.
  • Page 277 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 8 Dwell 8.2 Dwell (Revolution-based Designation); G04 Detailed description (1) In multiple-spindle control II, the spindle designated with the address D is invalid. To command the dwell (revo- lution-based designation), G95 needs to be designated. (2) The decimal point command is valid for the number of revolutions for dwell designated with the address X or U.
  • Page 278 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 8 Dwell 8.2 Dwell (Revolution-based Designation); G04 (9) If a feed hold signal is input while dwelling is performed, the count of the number of revolutions for dwell is inter- rupted. When the operation is restarted, the count of the number of revolutions for dwell is restarted. (10) The dwell is valid during the interlock.
  • Page 279 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 8 Dwell 8.2 Dwell (Revolution-based Designation); G04 IB-1501619-H...
  • Page 280 Miscellaneous Functions IB-1501619-H...
  • Page 281 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 9 Miscellaneous Functions 9.1 Miscellaneous Functions (M8-digits) 9Miscellaneous Functions 9.1 Miscellaneous Functions (M8-digits) Function and purpose The miscellaneous functions are also known as M functions, and they command auxiliary functions, such as spindle forward and reverse rotation, operation stop and coolant ON/OFF.
  • Page 282 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 9 Miscellaneous Functions 9.1 Miscellaneous Functions (M8-digits) Optional stop (M01) If the M01 command is read when the optional stop switch on the machine operation board is ON, it will stop reading the next block and perform the same operation as the M00. If the optional stop switch is OFF, the M01 command is ignored.
  • Page 283 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 9 Miscellaneous Functions 9.2 Second Miscellaneous Functions (A8-digits, B8-digits or C8-digits) 9.2 Second Miscellaneous Functions (A8-digits, B8-digits or C8-digits) Function and purpose These serve to assign the indexing table positioning, etc. In this controller, they are assigned by an 8-digit number from 0 to 99999999 following address A, B or C.
  • Page 284 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 9 Miscellaneous Functions 9.3 Index Table Indexing 9.3 Index Table Indexing Function and purpose Index table indexing can be carried out by setting the index axis. The indexing command only requires specifying the indexing angle to the axis set for indexing. It is not necessary to command special M codes for table clamping and unclamping, thus simplifying the program.
  • Page 285 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 9 Miscellaneous Functions 9.3 Index Table Indexing Type B operations (1) The movement command (either absolute or incremental) for the selected axis is executed with the program command. (2) The unclamp command signal is now output prior to the axis movement. (3) When the axes are unclamped, the unclamp completion signal is turned ON by the PLC.
  • Page 286 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 9 Miscellaneous Functions 9.3 Index Table Indexing Relationship with other functions Index table indexing and other functions Function Details Machine coordinate system selection (G53) Possible. Unidirectional positioning (*1) Servo ON/OFF signal control Perform the required process on the PLC. (*1) The unidirectional positioning function can be used in the machining center system only.
  • Page 287 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 9 Miscellaneous Functions 9.3 Index Table Indexing (2) Clamp and unclamp operations between continuous blocks (Reference position return) The operation during reference position return depends on the ignoring of intermediate points during return, and it depends on the MTB specifications (Parameter "#1091 Mpoint").
  • Page 288 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 9 Miscellaneous Functions 9.3 Index Table Indexing (2) When the macro interrupt program, executed during indexing axis movement, does not contain a movement command When executing the remaining blocks after completion of interrupt program, perform the unclamp operation at the restart of main program.
  • Page 289 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 9 Miscellaneous Functions 9.4 M Code Output during Axis Traveling ; G117 9.4 M Code Output during Axis Traveling ; G117 Function and purpose This function controls the timing at which miscellaneous functions are output, and it outputs a miscellaneous function when axis reaches at the designated position movement.
  • Page 290 Spindle Functions IB-1501619-H...
  • Page 291 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 10 Spindle Functions 10.1 Spindle Functions 10Spindle Functions 10.1 Spindle Functions Function and purpose (1) Spindle function (S 8-digit) This function allows you to designate an S command with an 8-digit number (0 to 99999999) following address S and include one pair of S commands in a single block.
  • Page 292 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 10 Spindle Functions 10.2 Constant Surface Speed Control; G96, G97 10.2 Constant Surface Speed Control; G96, G97 Function and purpose This function adjusts the spindle rotation speed (constant surface speed control) in accordance with the movement of the tool nose point so that the cutting point always remains at the constant speed (constant surface speed).
  • Page 293 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 10 Spindle Functions 10.2 Constant Surface Speed Control; G96, G97 Command format Constant surface speed ON G96 S__ P__ ; Surface speed (-99999999 to 99999999 (m/min), -99999999 to 99999999 (feet/min)) Constant surface speed control axis 0 to n (n: Number of axes that can be controlled in the part system with G96 commanded) Note (1) The S command is handled as the absolute value (the sign is ignored).
  • Page 294 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 10 Spindle Functions 10.2 Constant Surface Speed Control; G96, G97 (3) The spindle to be controlled is determined in the MTB specifications (parameter "#1300 ext36/bit0"). For multiple-spindle control I (*1), the spindle is determined by the spindle selection command in the G group 20. For multiple-spindle control II (*2), the spindle is determined by the spindle selection signal from the PLC.
  • Page 295 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 10 Spindle Functions 10.2 Constant Surface Speed Control; G96, G97 Temporary cancellation of constant surface speed control Whether a spindle rotation command from another part system is made invalid or valid for the spindle in the constant surface speed control mode in multiple-spindle control I depends on the MTB specifications (parameter "#1447 tmp_cancel").
  • Page 296 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 10 Spindle Functions 10.2 Constant Surface Speed Control; G96, G97 (2) If a constant surface speed control command from another part system is executed for the spindle in the con- stant surface speed control mode, the constant surface speed control shifts to the commanded part system. When a constant surface speed control command is issued from another part system even in a block in which the spindle rotation speed is changed by the constant surface speed control axis movement command, the constant surface speed control shifts to the commanded part system.
  • Page 297 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 10 Spindle Functions 10.2 Constant Surface Speed Control; G96, G97 (5) Whether to conduct spindle speed clamp command check depends on the MTB specifications (parameters "#1146 Sclamp" and "#1284 ext20/bit0".) If parameter "#1146 Sclamp" is set to "0", the spindle speed clamp command cannot be executed when constant surface speed control is turned off;...
  • Page 298 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 10 Spindle Functions 10.2 Constant Surface Speed Control; G96, G97 If the program is interrupted by reset or emergency stop while an operation error (M01 1043) occurs, the constant surface speed control mode is released, causing the operation error to be canceled. Whether to initialize the modal by reset depends on the MTB specifications (parameter "#1210 RstGmd/bit10").
  • Page 299 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 10 Spindle Functions 10.2 Constant Surface Speed Control; G96, G97 Arbitrary axis exchange control (1) If constant surface speed control axes are rearranged by the arbitrary axis exchange command, the spindle ro- tation speed is maintained at the value specified before rearrangement. (2) If a new surface speed is specified by the S command while the spindle rotation speed is maintained, it becomes valid when the rearranged constant surface speed axes are returned to the original status.
  • Page 300 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 10 Spindle Functions 10.2 Constant Surface Speed Control; G96, G97 (3) If the constant surface speed command is re-executed when constant surface speed axes are rearranged and the spindle rotation speed is maintained at the constant rotation speed, the kept spindle rotation speed is can- celed, and the reissued constant surface speed control command is executed.
  • Page 301 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 10 Spindle Functions 10.2 Constant Surface Speed Control; G96, G97 (5) If the surface speed is specified by the S command with the rearrangement of the constant surface speed axes while the constant surface speed control is in the temporary cancel state, the spindle rotation speed kept at tem- porary cancellation is applied, and the surface speed becomes constant when the constant surface speed axes are returned to the original arrangement.
  • Page 302 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 10 Spindle Functions 10.2 Constant Surface Speed Control; G96, G97 Other functions Function name Operation Spindle Clamp Speed Setting (G92/G50) The spindle clamp speed setting is valid in the constant surface speed control mode. Whether the commanded spindle clamp speed setting is kept when NC is reset during constant surface speed control depends on the MTB specifications.
  • Page 303 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 10 Spindle Functions 10.2 Constant Surface Speed Control; G96, G97 Function name Operation Arbitrary Axis Exchange (G140/G141) If constant surface speed control axes are rearranged by the arbitrary axis exchange command, the spindle rotation speed is maintained at the value specified before rearrangement.
  • Page 304 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 10 Spindle Functions 10.2 Constant Surface Speed Control; G96, G97 Precautions (1) Under the constant surface speed control (during G96 modal), if the axis targeted for the constant surface speed control (normally X axis for a lathe) moves toward the spindle center, the spindle rotation speed will increase and may exceed the allowable speed of the workpiece or chuck, etc.
  • Page 305 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 10 Spindle Functions 10.2 Constant Surface Speed Control; G96, G97 (6) Note that the rotation speed of the constant surface speed spindle may vary significantly at restart of constant surface speed processing when constant surface speed control axes are repositioned until they are rearranged by the arbitrary axis exchange command, they are returned to the original arrangement after the spindle rotation speed has been kept, and constant surface speed processing restarts.
  • Page 306 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 10 Spindle Functions 10.3 Spindle Clamp Speed Setting; G92 10.3 Spindle Clamp Speed Setting; G92 Function and purpose The maximum clamp rotation speed of the spindle can be assigned by address S following G92 and the minimum clamp rotation speed by address Q.
  • Page 307 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 10 Spindle Functions 10.3 Spindle Clamp Speed Setting; G92 Precautions (1) Once the maximum clamp speed and the minimum clamp speed are set using the spindle clamp speed setting (G92 S__ Q __), the maximum speed clamp will not be cancelled even if the command "G92 S0" is issued. During this time, the Q__ value is still valid and S0 <...
  • Page 308 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 10 Spindle Functions 10.4 Multiple-spindle Control 10.4 Multiple-spindle Control Function and purpose Multiple-spindle control is a function that controls second and following spindles in addition to the first spindle in a machine tool equipped with multiple spindles. The following types are available depending on the control method.
  • Page 309 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 10 Spindle Functions 10.4 Multiple-spindle Control 10.4.1 Multiple-spindle Control I (Spindle Control Command); S○= Function and purpose In addition to using the "S*****" S commands, it is also possible to assign commands which differentiate each spindle by using the S○=*****.
  • Page 310 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 10 Spindle Functions 10.4 Multiple-spindle Control 10.4.2 Multiple-spindle Control I (Spindle Selection Command) ; G43.1,G44.1, G47.1 Function and purpose This function is used to select the spindle that is targeted for the S command or feed per revolution in the machine that has two or more spindles.
  • Page 311 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 10 Spindle Functions 10.4 Multiple-spindle Control Detailed description Explanation of address Meaning of address Command range Remarks dress (unit) If a value exceeding the command range is Spindle designation Spindle No.: 1 to 8 Spindle number or spindle commanded, a program error (P35) occurs.
  • Page 312 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 10 Spindle Functions 10.4 Multiple-spindle Control (3) If the spindle function (S) command is designated in the same block as for the spindle selection command, the spindle that is targeted for the command varies depending on the sequence of the spindle selection command, D address, and S command.
  • Page 313 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 10 Spindle Functions 10.4 Multiple-spindle Control Spindle control rights If the constant surface speed control, S command and spindle related M command are commanded randomly from each part system to one spindle, the spindle may not operate correctly. For example, if S is commanded (feed per minute) from the 2nd part system ($2) during constant surface speed control with 1st part system ($1), the rotation speed will not change from the 1st part system side, and the actual rotation speed will relay on the 2nd part system from which S was commanded last.
  • Page 314 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 10 Spindle Functions 10.4 Multiple-spindle Control (2) If different S commands are executed simultaneously in two part systems, the part system with the larger part system No. will have the priority. That part system will also have the control rights. Program currently being executed Rotation speed 1st part system...
  • Page 315 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 10 Spindle Functions 10.4 Multiple-spindle Control S command (S*****, S○=*****), constant surface speed control Function G43.1 mode G44.1 mode S command in G97/G96 Command control for the 1st se- Command control for the 2nd se- Constant surface speed control lected spindle lected spindle...
  • Page 316 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 10 Spindle Functions 10.4 Multiple-spindle Control 10.4.3 Spindle Selection with Address P Function and purpose Spindle selection can be enabled using address P specified along with the S command. (Parameter "#1300 ext36/ bit0", "#1300 ext36/bit4") Set the spindle selection code with the parameter "#3199 spCode"...
  • Page 317 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 10 Spindle Functions 10.4 Multiple-spindle Control Detailed description (1) Select the spindle to be controlled using address P in the same block as the S command. (Example) Case where the parameter "#3199 spCode" is "1" for the 1st spindle and "2" for the 2nd spindle S3500 P1 ;...
  • Page 318 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 10 Spindle Functions 10.4 Multiple-spindle Control Relationship with other functions Relationship with G code that uses address P If a spindle selection command by address P and a G code using address P are issued in the same block, the pro- gram error (P135) occurs, excluding the following functions.
  • Page 319 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 10 Spindle Functions 10.4 Multiple-spindle Control Precautions (1) The "Spindle rotation upper limit exceeded" signal (X1880) and "Spindle rotation lower limit exceeded" signal (X1881) are output for each spindle regardless of the spindle selection command (G43.1/G44.1/G44.1 D_). (2) The spindle selection by address P can be commanded to each spindle from a machining program in any part system.
  • Page 320 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 10 Spindle Functions 10.5 Spindle Position Control (Spindle/C Axis Control) 10.5 Spindle Position Control (Spindle/C Axis Control) Function and purpose This function controls a spindle as the rotary axis. After switching the spindle to the rotary axis, the positioning and the interpolation between the spindle and other NC axes can be operated in the same way as the NC axis by exe- cuting the position command (the movement command).
  • Page 321 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 10 Spindle Functions 10.5 Spindle Position Control (Spindle/C Axis Control) (2) It depends on the MTB specifications (the parameter "#3129 cax_spec/bit2") either the spindle mode or the C axis mode is set when the power is turned ON. If the power is turned ON in the C axis mode setting, the mode shifts to the C axis mode.
  • Page 322 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 10 Spindle Functions 10.5 Spindle Position Control (Spindle/C Axis Control) Detailed description Mode switching (1) Example in which the mode is switched to the spindle mode with the forward run command and the rotation com- mand (S command) M03 command ->...
  • Page 323 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 10 Spindle Functions 10.5 Spindle Position Control (Spindle/C Axis Control) (3) Example in which the mode is not switched from the C axis mode to the spindle mode M03 command -> Forward run command (SRN) ON and reverse run command (SRI) OFF Program example Mode Description...
  • Page 324 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 10 Spindle Functions 10.5 Spindle Position Control (Spindle/C Axis Control) Manual operation with the program command method selected To rotate the spindle/C axis as the C axis in the manual operation mode, change the "C axis selection" signal (CMOD) from OFF to ON to switch to the C axis mode while the "Servo OFF"...
  • Page 325 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 10 Spindle Functions 10.5 Spindle Position Control (Spindle/C Axis Control) Designating the zero point return type or deceleration stop type The operation differs depending on the method to switch from the spindle mode to the C axis mode. (The method depends on the MTB specifications.) Method to switch Operation contents...
  • Page 326 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 10 Spindle Functions 10.5 Spindle Position Control (Spindle/C Axis Control) Relationship with other functions Spindle forward-run start (SRN) and spindle reverse-run start (SRI) The mode is switched to the C axis mode regardless of the state of the spindle forward-run start (SRN) or spindle reverse-run start (SRI) signal.
  • Page 327 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 10 Spindle Functions 10.5 Spindle Position Control (Spindle/C Axis Control) Spindle override The spindle override is invalid for the zero point return operation at switching to the C axis mode. In the C axis mode, the spindle override is invalid.
  • Page 328 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 10 Spindle Functions 10.5 Spindle Position Control (Spindle/C Axis Control) Control axis superimposition control and arbitrary axis superimposition (1) If the spindle is commanded as the superimposition-related axis in the spindle mode, it causes an operation error (M01 1004).
  • Page 329 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 10 Spindle Functions 10.6 Spindle Speed Fluctuation Detection; G162/G163 10.6 Spindle Speed Fluctuation Detection; G162/G163 Function and purpose When this function is valid and the spindle actual speed fluctuates relative to the programmed speed due to external factors such as load fluctuation, the NC outputs the signal (Spindle speed out of setting range) to PLC and causes the operation error (M01 1105) at the same time.
  • Page 330 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 10 Spindle Functions 10.6 Spindle Speed Fluctuation Detection; G162/G163 Command format Starting the spindle speed fluctuation detection G162 S__ P__ Q__ R__ I__ ; Spindle name of detection target Spindle speed fluctuation detection start delay time Spindle up-to-speed detection width Allowable fluctuation rate of spindle speed Allowable fluctuation range of spindle speed...
  • Page 331 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 10 Spindle Functions 10.6 Spindle Speed Fluctuation Detection; G162/G163 Command range (unit) Remarks dress This sets the allowable fluctuation speed range calculated for the spindle 1 to 100 (%) command speed. When the actual spindle speed exceeds the range, the signal is output to PLC and the operation error (M01 1105) occurs.
  • Page 332 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 10 Spindle Functions 10.6 Spindle Speed Fluctuation Detection; G162/G163 Operation example Start timing of spindle speed fluctuation detection When one of the following conditions is satisfied after G162 command, the spindle speed fluctuation detection starts: Case in which the start delay time of the spindle speed fluctuation detection (set by "P") elapses (Refer to (1) fig- ure.) Case in which the spindle actual speed is within the detection range to achieve spindle speed (set by "Q") (Refer...
  • Page 333 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 10 Spindle Functions 10.6 Spindle Speed Fluctuation Detection; G162/G163 (2) Case in which the spindle actual speed is within the detection range to achieve spindle speed (set by "Q") Commanded speed N1 G97 G98; N2 S__;...
  • Page 334 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 10 Spindle Functions 10.6 Spindle Speed Fluctuation Detection; G162/G163 Fluctuation detection start timing when the spindle command speed is changed When the spindle command speed is changed by S command or spindle override, the state is the same as the one immediately after G162 command and the fluctuation detection is not performed until the condition of "Start timing of spindle speed fluctuation detection"...
  • Page 335 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 10 Spindle Functions 10.6 Spindle Speed Fluctuation Detection; G162/G163 When the spindle speed fluctuation detection command (G162) is performed during the spindle speed fluc- tuation detection When the command with the exact same settings is given to the axis where this function is enabled, the command is ignored.
  • Page 336 Tool Functions IB-1501619-H...
  • Page 337 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 11 Tool Functions 11.1 Tool Functions (T8-digit BCD) 11Tool Functions 11.1 Tool Functions (T8-digit BCD) Function and purpose The tool functions are also known as T functions and they assign the tool numbers and tool compensation numbers. A numerical value of 8-digit (0 to 99999999) following address T indicates a command using first digits and last digits for a tool number and tool compensation number respectively.
  • Page 338 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 11 Tool Functions 11.2 T Code Mirror Image for Facing Tool Posts 11.2 T Code Mirror Image for Facing Tool Posts Function and purpose In a machine in which the base turret and facing turret are integrated, this function is used to cut with the facing turret cutter using a program created with the base turret side.
  • Page 339 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 11 Tool Functions 11.2 T Code Mirror Image for Facing Tool Posts IB-1501619-H...
  • Page 340 Tool Compensation Functions IB-1501619-H...
  • Page 341 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 12 Tool Compensation Functions 12.1 Tool Compensation 12Tool Compensation Functions 12.1 Tool Compensation Function and purpose Tool compensation is performed by the T functions which are commanded with the number following address T. First digits and last digits are used for the tool number and compensation number respectively.
  • Page 342 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 12 Tool Compensation Functions 12.1 Tool Compensation 12.1.1 Tool Compensation Start Detailed description There are two ways to execute tool compensation and these can be selected by parameters: executing compensa- tion when the T command is executed or executing compensation in the block with a movement command instead of performing compensation when the T command is executed.
  • Page 343 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 12 Tool Compensation Functions 12.1 Tool Compensation (2) Compensation with movement command N1 T0101 ; N2 X100. Z200. ; Path after compensation Compensation amount Machining program path Tool length compensation and tool nose wear compensation are conducted simultaneously. <Note>...
  • Page 344 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 12 Tool Compensation Functions 12.1 Tool Compensation 12.1.2 Expanded Method of Starting Tool Compensation Function and purpose By setting the parameter "#1100 Tmove", the compensation operation when T is commanded is selected whether that is carried out when the T command is executed or carried out with superimposed on the movement command.
  • Page 345 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 12 Tool Compensation Functions 12.1 Tool Compensation <Note> When performing wear compensation with T command execution, if the following G commands are issued in the same block as the T command, compensation will not be performed until other G commands are issued. However, if an axis is specified by the command, compensation will be performed only to the specified axis.
  • Page 346 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 12 Tool Compensation Functions 12.1 Tool Compensation #1100 = "0" (Compensates when the T command is executed.) When the T command is executed, the compensation operation method depends on the MTB specifications (param- eter "#1296 ext32/bit4").
  • Page 347 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 12 Tool Compensation Functions 12.1 Tool Compensation 12.1.3 Allocation of Tool Compensation Sets to Part Systems Function and purpose The number of tool offset sets can be set per part system. This function is divided into the following methods and which one is used depends on the MTB specifications (pa- rameters "#1438 Ofs-SysAssign", "#12054 Tol-Ofsnum").
  • Page 348 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 12 Tool Compensation Functions 12.1 Tool Compensation Precautions (1) The maximum number of tool offset sets for 1-part system is 999. (2) For 1-part system, up to the number of tool offset sets in the system is available regardless of the parameter setting.
  • Page 349 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 12 Tool Compensation Functions 12.1 Tool Compensation 12.1.4 Tool Compensation for Additional Axes Function and purpose The tool compensation for the lathe is valid for the first axis (basic X axis) and the second axis (basic Z axis). If the third axis and following axes are added, the tool compensation is also valid for the additional axes.
  • Page 350 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 12 Tool Compensation Functions 12.1 Tool Compensation Detailed description When axis exchange is made under the mixed control (cross axis control) or arbitrary axis exchange control (1) When part system 1 and part system 2 have same axis configuration and axis names $1 "#1026 Base axis_I"= X, "#1027 Base axis_J"= Y, "#1028 Base axis_Z"= Z $2 "#1026 Base axis_I"= X, "#1027 Base axis_J"= Y, "#1028 Base axis_Z"= Z Axis configuration Selection method...
  • Page 351 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 12 Tool Compensation Functions 12.1 Tool Compensation (3) When part system 1 and part system 2 differ in axis configuration and axis name (differ by two axes) $1 "#1026 Base axis_I"= X, "#1027 Base axis_J"= Y, "#1028 Base axis_Z"= Z $2 "#1026 Base axis_I"= X, "#1027 Base axis_J"= Y, "#1028 Base axis_Z"= Z Axis configuration Selection method Operation...
  • Page 352 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 12 Tool Compensation Functions 12.1 Tool Compensation 12.1.5 Tool Compensation for 2nd Additional Axis Function and purpose In addition to the tool compensation for additional axes, tool compensation can be enabled for another axis. The axis to which tool compensation for the 2nd additional axis is to be applied is determined according to the settings of the following two parameters.
  • Page 353 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 12 Tool Compensation Functions 12.1 Tool Compensation As shown below, if the parameter "#12103" is set for the 1st axis, 2nd axis, or the axis for tool compensation for additional axes, tool compensation for the 2nd additional axis is disabled. (The tool compensation amount of the 1st axis, 2nd axis, or the axis for tool compensation for additional axes takes priority.) When the parameters in the 1st part system ($1) are set as follows: #12103 = 1...
  • Page 354 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 12 Tool Compensation Functions 12.1 Tool Compensation (2) As shown below, if axis exchange is carried out after tool compensation has been completed, the axis moves while the tool compensation amount remains kept. When both the parameters of the 1st part system ($1) and the 2nd part system ($2) are set as shown below: #12103 = 1 #12104 = B...
  • Page 355 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 12 Tool Compensation Functions 12.1 Tool Compensation (3) As shown below, an axis that is not specified in the parameter "#1013 axname" of the same part system can also be set. When the axis specified by axis exchange used, tool compensation can be applied to the axis. When both the parameters of the 1st part system ($1) and the 2nd part system ($2) are set as shown below: $1 parameter $2 parameter...
  • Page 356 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 12 Tool Compensation Functions 12.2 Tool Length Compensation 12.2 Tool Length Compensation Detailed description Tool length compensation amount setting This function compensates the tool length with respect to the programmed basic position. This position may gener- ally be set to either the center position of the turret or the tool nose position of the basic tool.
  • Page 357 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 12 Tool Compensation Functions 12.2 Tool Length Compensation Tool length compensation cancel (1) When compensation No. 0 is ordered Tool length compensation is canceled when the tool length compensation No. 0 is assigned in the T command. N1 X10.0 Z10.0 F10 ;...
  • Page 358 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 12 Tool Compensation Functions 12.3 Tool Nose Wear Compensation 12.3 Tool Nose Wear Compensation Detailed description Tool nose wear compensation amount setting The wear sustained by the tool being used can be compensated. X-axis tool nose wear compensation amount Z-axis tool nose wear compensation amount...
  • Page 359 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 12 Tool Compensation Functions 12.4 Tool Offset Change during Automatic Operation 12.4 Tool Offset Change during Automatic Operation Function and purpose This function is used to change the currently selected tool length compensation amount and wear compensation amount during automatic operation.
  • Page 360 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 12 Tool Compensation Functions 12.4 Tool Offset Change during Automatic Operation Operation example The following program shows an example to change the compensation amount while N4 block is executed. Even when the tool length compensation amount or wear compensation amount of the X axis is changed in the N4 block, the change is not reflected in the N5 and N6 blocks which have been read into the pre-read buffer as described above in [Exception].
  • Page 361 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 12 Tool Compensation Functions 12.5 Tool Nose Radius Compensation; G40, G41, G42, G46 12.5 Tool Nose Radius Compensation; G40, G41, G42, G46 Function and purpose Because a tool nose is generally rounded, a hypothetical tool nose point is used for programming. Due to this round- ness of the tool nose, there will be a gap between the programmed shape and the actual cutting shape during taper cutting or circular cutting.
  • Page 362 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 12 Tool Compensation Functions 12.5 Tool Nose Radius Compensation; G40, G41, G42, G46 Detailed description (1) G41 works on condition that the tool is located on the left of the workpiece to the direction of motion. G42 works on condition that the tool is located on the right of the workpiece to the direction of motion.
  • Page 363 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 12 Tool Compensation Functions 12.5 Tool Nose Radius Compensation; G40, G41, G42, G46 12.5.1 Tool Nose Point and Compensation Direction Detailed description Tool nose point Because a tool nose is generally rounded, the programmed tool nose position is adjusted to a point "P" shown in the examples figures below.
  • Page 364 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 12 Tool Compensation Functions 12.5 Tool Nose Radius Compensation; G40, G41, G42, G46 (2) When the tool nose point is adjusted to the machining start position (Tool nose point "3") G42/G46 Programmed path or machining shape with tool nose radius compensation Path of tool nose center with nose R compensation Machining shape with no nose R compensation Compensation direction of G46...
  • Page 365 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 12 Tool Compensation Functions 12.5 Tool Nose Radius Compensation; G40, G41, G42, G46 (3) When the compensation direction during tool nose radius compensation corresponds to a "×" in the table below, the previous direction will be resumed. [How to determine the compensation direction by the movement vectors and tool nose point in command G46] Direction of tool...
  • Page 366 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 12 Tool Compensation Functions 12.5 Tool Nose Radius Compensation; G40, G41, G42, G46 12.5.2 Nose R Compensation Operations Detailed description Nose R compensation cancel mode The nose R compensation cancel mode is established by any of the following conditions. (1) After the power has been switched on (2) After the reset button on the setting and display unit has been pressed (3) After the M02 or M30 command with reset function has been executed...
  • Page 367 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 12 Tool Compensation Functions 12.5 Tool Nose Radius Compensation; G40, G41, G42, G46 Type Description Type A When starting up/canceling a command block with nose R compensation and tool radius compensation, type A will not conduct intersection operation processing to the block and, in- stead, convert it to an offset vector which is vertical to the command vector.
  • Page 368 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 12 Tool Compensation Functions 12.5 Tool Nose Radius Compensation; G40, G41, G42, G46 (2) When G41, G42 or G46 is issued at an inside corner in the same block as a movement command Linear ->...
  • Page 369 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 12 Tool Compensation Functions 12.5 Tool Nose Radius Compensation; G40, G41, G42, G46 (3) When G41, G42 or G46 is issued alone at an outside corner (obtuse angle) Type A Type B N1 G41; N3 G01 N3 G01 N2 G00 X_Z_;...
  • Page 370 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 12 Tool Compensation Functions 12.5 Tool Nose Radius Compensation; G40, G41, G42, G46 (4) When G41, G42 or G46 is issued at an outside corner (obtuse angle) in the same block as a movement command [90°...
  • Page 371 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 12 Tool Compensation Functions 12.5 Tool Nose Radius Compensation; G40, G41, G42, G46 (5) When G41, G42 or G46 is issued alone at an outside corner (acute angle) Type A Type B N1 G41; N3 G01 N3 G01 N2 G00 X_Z_;...
  • Page 372 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 12 Tool Compensation Functions 12.5 Tool Nose Radius Compensation; G40, G41, G42, G46 (6) When G41, G42 or G46 is issued at an outside corner (acute angle) in the same block as a movement command [θ...
  • Page 373 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 12 Tool Compensation Functions 12.5 Tool Nose Radius Compensation; G40, G41, G42, G46 (1) Machining an outside corner Linear -> Linear (90°<= θ < 180°) Linear -> Linear (0° < θ < 90°) Linear ->...
  • Page 374 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 12 Tool Compensation Functions 12.5 Tool Nose Radius Compensation; G40, G41, G42, G46 (2) Machining an inside corner Linear -> Linear (Obtuse angle) Linear -> Linear (Acute angle) Linear -> Circular (Obtuse angle) Linear ->...
  • Page 375 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 12 Tool Compensation Functions 12.5 Tool Nose Radius Compensation; G40, G41, G42, G46 (3) When the circular end point is not on the circular When the error is within the parameter "#1084 RadErr", the area from the circular start point to the end point is interpolated as a spiral circular.
  • Page 376 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 12 Tool Compensation Functions 12.5 Tool Nose Radius Compensation; G40, G41, G42, G46 Tool nose radius compensation cancel In nose R compensation mode, nose R compensation will be canceled when any of the following conditions is met. However, there must be any movement command except a circular command.
  • Page 377 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 12 Tool Compensation Functions 12.5 Tool Nose Radius Compensation; G40, G41, G42, G46 (3) Relation of an inside corner/outside corner and cancel (a)-1 When G40 is issued alone at an inside corner N1 G01 X_Z_F_; N2 G00 X_Z_;...
  • Page 378 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 12 Tool Compensation Functions 12.5 Tool Nose Radius Compensation; G40, G41, G42, G46 (a)-2 When G40 is issued at an inside corner in the same block as a movement command Linear -> Linear Circular ->...
  • Page 379 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 12 Tool Compensation Functions 12.5 Tool Nose Radius Compensation; G40, G41, G42, G46 (b)-1 When G40 is issued alone at an outside corner (obtuse angle) Type A Type B N1 G01 N1 G01 X_Z_F_; N2 G00 X_Z_;...
  • Page 380 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 12 Tool Compensation Functions 12.5 Tool Nose Radius Compensation; G40, G41, G42, G46 (b)-2 When G40 is issued at an outside corner (obtuse angle) in the same block as a movement command Linear -> Linear (Type A) Circular ->...
  • Page 381 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 12 Tool Compensation Functions 12.5 Tool Nose Radius Compensation; G40, G41, G42, G46 (c)-1 When G40 is issued alone at an outside corner (acute angle) Type A Type B N1 G01 N1 G01 X_Z_F_; N2 G00 X_Z_;...
  • Page 382 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 12 Tool Compensation Functions 12.5 Tool Nose Radius Compensation; G40, G41, G42, G46 (c)-2 When G40 is issued at an outside corner (acute angle) in the same block as a movement command Linear -> Linear (Type A) Circular ->...
  • Page 383 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 12 Tool Compensation Functions 12.5 Tool Nose Radius Compensation; G40, G41, G42, G46 12.5.3 Other Operations during Nose R Compensation Detailed description Changing the compensation direction during nose R compensation The compensation direction is determined by the nose R compensation commands (G41, G42). G code Compensation direction Left-side compensation...
  • Page 384 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 12 Tool Compensation Functions 12.5 Tool Nose Radius Compensation; G40, G41, G42, G46 (3) Circular -> Circular (a) When there is an intersection at the change of compensation direction (b) When there is no intersection at the change of compensation direction (CP) Center of arc (CP) (CP)
  • Page 385 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 12 Tool Compensation Functions 12.5 Tool Nose Radius Compensation; G40, G41, G42, G46 Nose R compensation of path closed by G46/G41/G42 (1) G46 command operation (2) G42 -> G41 command operation (When commanding G41 at (a)) G01(G41) (G42)
  • Page 386 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 12 Tool Compensation Functions 12.5 Tool Nose Radius Compensation; G40, G41, G42, G46 Command for eliminating compensation vectors temporarily When the following command is issued in the compensation mode, the compensation vectors are temporarily elim- inated and then, compensation mode will automatically return.
  • Page 387 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 12 Tool Compensation Functions 12.5 Tool Nose Radius Compensation; G40, G41, G42, G46 (3) Positioning (G00) commands Tool nose radius compensation is temporarily canceled with G00 commands. N1 G01 X_Z_F_; N5 G01 N1 G01 N2 G00 X_Z_;...
  • Page 388 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 12 Tool Compensation Functions 12.5 Tool Nose Radius Compensation; G40, G41, G42, G46 Blocks without movement The following blocks are known as blocks without movement. M03 ; M command S12 ; S command T0101 ;...
  • Page 389 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 12 Tool Compensation Functions 12.5 Tool Nose Radius Compensation; G40, G41, G42, G46 (3) When commanded together with compensation cancel Only the compensation vectors are canceled when a block without movement is commanded together with the G40 command.
  • Page 390 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 12 Tool Compensation Functions 12.5 Tool Nose Radius Compensation; G40, G41, G42, G46 12.5.4 G41/G42 Commands and I, J, K Designation Function and purpose The compensation direction can be intentionally changed by issuing the G41/G42 command and I, J, K in the same block.
  • Page 391 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 12 Tool Compensation Functions 12.5 Tool Nose Radius Compensation; G40, G41, G42, G46 (2) When there are no movement commands at the compensation start. (G40) N1 G41 K150. T0101 ; N2 U100. W100. ; N3 W150.
  • Page 392 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 12 Tool Compensation Functions 12.5 Tool Nose Radius Compensation; G40, G41, G42, G46 Offset vector direction (1) In G41 mode Direction produced by rotating the direction commanded by I, K by 90° to the left when looking at the zero point from the forward direction of the Y axis (3rd axis).
  • Page 393 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 12 Tool Compensation Functions 12.5 Tool Nose Radius Compensation; G40, G41, G42, G46 Compensation amount for offset vectors The compensation amount is determined by the offset No. (modal) in a block with the I, K designation. <Example 1>...
  • Page 394 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 12 Tool Compensation Functions 12.5 Tool Nose Radius Compensation; G40, G41, G42, G46 12.5.5 Interrupts during Nose R Compensation Detailed description MDI interruption Nose R compensation is valid in any automatic operation mode - whether tape, memory or MDI mode. The figure below shows what happens by MDI interruption after stopping the block during tape or memory mode.
  • Page 395 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 12 Tool Compensation Functions 12.5 Tool Nose Radius Compensation; G40, G41, G42, G46 Manual interruption (1) Interrupt with manual absolute OFF. The tool path will deviate from the compensated path by the interrupt amount. Program path Tool path after compensation Interrupt (A)
  • Page 396 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 12 Tool Compensation Functions 12.5 Tool Nose Radius Compensation; G40, G41, G42, G46 12.5.6 General Precautions for Nose R Compensation Precautions Assigning the compensation amounts (1) The compensation amount is normally assigned by designating the No. of the compensation amount by the last 1 or 2 digits of the T code.
  • Page 397 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 12 Tool Compensation Functions 12.5 Tool Nose Radius Compensation; G40, G41, G42, G46 12.5.7 Interference Check Function and purpose A tool, whose tool nose has been compensated under the tool nose radius compensation function by the usual two- block pre-read, may sometimes cut into the workpiece.
  • Page 398 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 12 Tool Compensation Functions 12.5 Tool Nose Radius Compensation; G40, G41, G42, G46 Operation when interference avoidance function is valid (CP) Program path Path of tool nose center when interference check is invalid Tool center path when interference is avoided (*: Linear movement) Valid vector Invalid vector...
  • Page 399 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 12 Tool Compensation Functions 12.5 Tool Nose Radius Compensation; G40, G41, G42, G46 Interference check alarm The interference check alarm occurs under the following conditions. (1) When the interference check alarm function has been selected When all vectors at the end of its own block have been deleted As shown in the figure below, when vectors 1 through 4 at the end point of the N1 block have all been deleted, program error (P153) will occur prior to N1 execution.
  • Page 400 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 12 Tool Compensation Functions 12.5 Tool Nose Radius Compensation; G40, G41, G42, G46 In the case shown in the figure below, the tool will move in the reverse direction at N2. Program error (P153) now occurs before executing N1 and the operation stops. 1 2 3 4 P153 (Example 2) When avoidance vectors cannot be created...
  • Page 401 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 12 Tool Compensation Functions 12.5 Tool Nose Radius Compensation; G40, G41, G42, G46 (Example 3) When the program advance direction and the advance direction after compensation are reversed When grooves, narrower than the nose R diameter with parallel or widening bottom, are programmed, it will still be regarded as interference even if there is actually no interference.
  • Page 402 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 12 Tool Compensation Functions 12.5 Tool Nose Radius Compensation; G40, G41, G42, G46 (Example 4) When vectors at the end point of the block immediately before the command to eliminate compensation vectors temporarily cause an interference Interference check will be executed also at the end point of the block immediately before the command to eliminate compensation vectors temporarily, similarly with the case compensation vectors are not eliminated.
  • Page 403 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 12 Tool Compensation Functions 12.5 Tool Nose Radius Compensation; G40, G41, G42, G46 IB-1501619-H...
  • Page 404 Fixed Cycle IB-1501619-H...
  • Page 405 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 13 Fixed Cycle 13.1 Fixed Cycle for Turning Machining 13Fixed Cycle 13.1 Fixed Cycle for Turning Machining Function and purpose When performing rough cutting and other cuttings by turning machining, fixed cycles are effective in simplifying ma- chining programs.
  • Page 406 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 13 Fixed Cycle 13.1 Fixed Cycle for Turning Machining 13.1.1 Longitudinal Cutting Cycle; G77 Function and purpose The longitudinal cutting cycle performs continuous straight and taper cutting in the longitudinal direction. Command format Straight cutting G77 X/U__ Z/W__ F__ ;...
  • Page 407 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 13 Fixed Cycle 13.1 Fixed Cycle for Turning Machining Detailed description Straight cutting 4(R) 1(R) 3(F) 2(F) (R) Rapid traverse (F) Cutting feed (E) End point coordinates Taper cutting 4(R) 3(F) 1(R) 2(F) (R) Rapid traverse (F) Cutting feed (E) End point coordinates...
  • Page 408 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 13 Fixed Cycle 13.1 Fixed Cycle for Turning Machining Detailed description With a single block, the tool stops at the end points of operations 1, 2, 3 and 4 shown above. Depending on the signs of u, w and r, the following shapes are created. (a) u <...
  • Page 409 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 13 Fixed Cycle 13.1 Fixed Cycle for Turning Machining 13.1.2 Thread Cutting Cycle; G78 Function and purpose Thread cutting cycle is a fixed cycle which performs straight and taper thread cutting. The operation of thread cutting is same as the thread cutting command(G33). Command format Straight thread cutting G78 X/U__ Z/W__ F/E__ Q__ ;...
  • Page 410 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 13 Fixed Cycle 13.1 Fixed Cycle for Turning Machining Detailed description Straight thread cutting With a single block, the tool stops at the end points of operations 1, 3 and 4. 4(R) 3(R) 1(R) 2(F) (R) Rapid traverse...
  • Page 411 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 13 Fixed Cycle 13.1 Fixed Cycle for Turning Machining Detailed description (1) Details for chamfering α: Thread chamfering amount This value is set in the parameter "#8014 CDZ- VALE". The available range is 0 to 12.7 leads. It can be set in 0.1L units.
  • Page 412 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 13 Fixed Cycle 13.1 Fixed Cycle for Turning Machining (3) Depending on the signs of u, w and r, the following shapes are created. (a) u < 0, w < 0, r < 0 (b) u <...
  • Page 413 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 13 Fixed Cycle 13.1 Fixed Cycle for Turning Machining 13.1.3 Face Cutting Cycle; G79 Function and purpose The face cutting cycle performs continuous straight and taper cutting in the face direction. Command format Straight cutting G79 X/U__ Z/W__ F__ ;...
  • Page 414 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 13 Fixed Cycle 13.1 Fixed Cycle for Turning Machining Detailed description Straight cutting 1(R) 2(F) 4(R) 3(F) (R) Rapid traverse (F) Cutting feed (E) End point coordinates Taper cutting 1(R) 2(F) 4(R) 3(F) (R) Rapid traverse (F) Cutting feed (E) End point coordinates...
  • Page 415 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 13 Fixed Cycle 13.1 Fixed Cycle for Turning Machining Detailed description With a single block, the tool stops at the end points of operations 1, 2, 3 and 4 shown above. Depending on the signs of u, w and r, the following shapes are created. (a) u <...
  • Page 416 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 13 Fixed Cycle 13.2 Fixed Cycles for Turning Machining (MITSUBISHI CNC Special Format) ; G77, G78, G79 13.2 Fixed Cycles for Turning Machining (MITSUBISHI CNC Special Format) ; G77, G78, G79 Function and purpose When performing rough cutting and other cutting by turning machining, fixed cycles are effective in simplifying ma- chining programs.
  • Page 417 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 13 Fixed Cycle 13.2 Fixed Cycles for Turning Machining (MITSUBISHI CNC Special Format) ; G77, G78, G79 Detailed description (1) Comparison of MITSUBISHI CNC special format and normal format Some addresses in the MITSUBISHI CNC special format differ from the normal format. Function MITSUBISHI CNC special Normal format...
  • Page 418 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 13 Fixed Cycle 13.3 Compound Type Fixed Cycle for Turning Machining 13.3 Compound Type Fixed Cycle for Turning Machining Function and purpose This function enables to perform a prepared fixed cycle by commanding a program in a block. The types of fixed cycles are listed below.
  • Page 419 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 13 Fixed Cycle 13.3 Compound Type Fixed Cycle for Turning Machining 13.3.1 Longitudinal Rough Cutting Cycle; G71 Function and purpose This function calls the finished shape program and, while automatically calculating the tool path, performs rough cut- ting in the longitudinal direction.
  • Page 420 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 13 Fixed Cycle 13.3 Compound Type Fixed Cycle for Turning Machining Note (1) A reversible parameter enables to use parameter setting value without issuing a program command and also, the value can be changed by the program command. Cutting amount: Ud (1) Designate the cutting amount by Ud or parameter "#8051 G71 THICK".
  • Page 421 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 13 Fixed Cycle 13.3 Compound Type Fixed Cycle for Turning Machining Cutting method and retract amount: Re (1) Designate the retract amount by Re or the parameter "#8052 G71 PULL UP" (0 to 99.999mm). (2) The cutting method differs according to whether pocket machining is ON or OFF.
  • Page 422 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 13 Fixed Cycle 13.3 Compound Type Fixed Cycle for Turning Machining Finished shape start block and finished shape end block:Aa, Pp, Qq Designate the finished shape start block and finished shape end block by Aa, Pp, Qq. If calling a subprogram numbered with O is enabled, a program number starting with O and specified by A command value is called.
  • Page 423 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 13 Fixed Cycle 13.3 Compound Type Fixed Cycle for Turning Machining <When creating a finished shape program in a ma- <When creating a finished shape program in a pro- chining program other than the one currently being gram currently being executed>...
  • Page 424 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 13 Fixed Cycle 13.3 Compound Type Fixed Cycle for Turning Machining Finishing allowance: Uu, Ww When the finishing allowance is designated, the Uu/Ww part will be left uncut from the finished shape. X axis finishing allowance: The finishing allowance is left uncut in the rough cutting start point direction. <Finishing allowance when pocket machining is OFF or when machining an open section when pocket ma- chining is ON>...
  • Page 425 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 13 Fixed Cycle 13.3 Compound Type Fixed Cycle for Turning Machining Detailed description Validity of pocket machining It is judged that there is a pocket section when down cutting (finished shape block in which previous movement block has no X axis movement command, or the X axis moves in the reverse direction of the hole base and then moves toward the hole base) is issued between the block following the finished shape start block and the end block.
  • Page 426 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 13 Fixed Cycle 13.3 Compound Type Fixed Cycle for Turning Machining Rough cutting direction <Rough cutting direction when pocket machining is OFF> [Automatically determine according to finished shape (#1273 ext09/bit2=0)] The rough cutting direction is determined in the following manner according to the finished shape. X axis of C (finished shape end block) >...
  • Page 427 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 13 Fixed Cycle 13.3 Compound Type Fixed Cycle for Turning Machining <Rough cutting direction when pocket machining is ON> Select one of the followings. [Automatically determine according to finished shape (#1273 ext09/bit2=0)] The rough cutting direction is determined in the following manner according to the finished shape. X axis of A (G71 cycle command point) >...
  • Page 428 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 13 Fixed Cycle 13.3 Compound Type Fixed Cycle for Turning Machining Finished shape Cut start position (#1271 ext07/bit5) The cut start position is calculated from the final position of the finished shape program; however, this can be changed to the cycle start point.
  • Page 429 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 13 Fixed Cycle 13.3 Compound Type Fixed Cycle for Turning Machining <Finished shape in Z axis direction when pocket machining is OFF> The Z axis direction finishing allowance must be based on monotonous changes (increment only or decrement only). The program error (P203) occurs if the shape is illegal.
  • Page 430 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 13 Fixed Cycle 13.3 Compound Type Fixed Cycle for Turning Machining <Finished shape in Z axis direction when pocket machining is ON> The finishing allowance on Z direction must always change monotonously (only increment or only decrement). Sections that do not change monotonously will have a finished shape with a cover.
  • Page 431 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 13 Fixed Cycle 13.3 Compound Type Fixed Cycle for Turning Machining Finished shape during tool nose R compensation Selection of tool nose R compensation (#1271 ext07/bit6) <#1271 ext07/bit6 = 0> If there is a G71 command during tool nose R compensation, the G71 cycle command point will be the position where the tool nose R compensation is temporarily canceled.
  • Page 432 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 13 Fixed Cycle 13.3 Compound Type Fixed Cycle for Turning Machining Roughing along finishing shape <When pocket machining is OFF> When the parameter "#19437 Skip fin in rough1" is set to "0", roughing along finishing shape is performed. When the parameter "#19437 Skip fin in rough1"...
  • Page 433 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 13 Fixed Cycle 13.3 Compound Type Fixed Cycle for Turning Machining Path after roughing along finishing shape After roughing along finishing shape is completed, the operation varies depending on the parameter setting. When the parameter "#19442 Path at G71 comp."...
  • Page 434 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 13 Fixed Cycle 13.3 Compound Type Fixed Cycle for Turning Machining While the parameter "#19442 Path at G71 comp." is set to "0", if the cycle command point is lower than the end point of the finishing shape, the tool may interfere with the workpiece when moving to the cycle command point after roughing along the finishing shape.
  • Page 435 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 13 Fixed Cycle 13.3 Compound Type Fixed Cycle for Turning Machining Program example Machining of open section (example with pocket machining OFF) G00 X80.0 Z75.0 T0101; G71 Ud Re H0; G71 U10. R3. H0; G71 P10 Q20 U3.W1.5 F500 S1500;...
  • Page 436 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 13 Fixed Cycle 13.3 Compound Type Fixed Cycle for Turning Machining Machining of mid-section (example with pocket machining ON) G00 X80.0 Z75.0 T0101; G71 Ud Re H1; G71 U10. R3. H1; G71 P10 Q20 U3.W1.5 F500 S1500; N10 G00 X60.0 Z73.0;...
  • Page 437 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 13 Fixed Cycle 13.3 Compound Type Fixed Cycle for Turning Machining 13.3.2 Face Rough Cutting Cycle; G72 Function and purpose This function calls the finished shape program and, while automatically calculating the tool path, performs rough cut- ting in the face direction.
  • Page 438 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 13 Fixed Cycle 13.3 Compound Type Fixed Cycle for Turning Machining Example of a finished shape without pocket Example of a finished shape with pocket G72 Wd Re H0; G72 Wd Re H1; G72 Pp Qq G72 Pp Qq (R/f)
  • Page 439 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 13 Fixed Cycle 13.3 Compound Type Fixed Cycle for Turning Machining 13.3.3 Formed Material Rough Cutting Cycle; G73 Function and purpose This function calls the finished shape program, automatically calculates the tool path and performs rough cutting while cutting the workpiece into the finished shape.
  • Page 440 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 13 Fixed Cycle 13.3 Compound Type Fixed Cycle for Turning Machining Detailed description Finished shape In the program, S -> A -> E in the figure below are commanded. The section between A and E must be a shape with monotonous changes in both the X axis and Z axis directions. k + w i + u/2 S : G73 cycle command point...
  • Page 441 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 13 Fixed Cycle 13.3 Compound Type Fixed Cycle for Turning Machining Cut amount The cut amount is calculated by dividing the cutting allowances (i, k) by the number of divisions (d-1). X axis direction i/(d-1) Z axis direction k/(d-1) When the allowance is not divisible, chamfering will be performed and adjustment will be made at the final pass.
  • Page 442 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 13 Fixed Cycle 13.3 Compound Type Fixed Cycle for Turning Machining Cutting direction Determined according to finish shape (#1273 ext09/bit2=0) The shift direction for the cutting is determined by the shape in the finishing program, as shown in the table below. Drawing Initial - direction...
  • Page 443 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 13 Fixed Cycle 13.3 Compound Type Fixed Cycle for Turning Machining 13.3.4 Finishing Cycle; G70 Function and purpose After rough cutting have been carried out by the G71 to G73 commands, finishing cutting can be performed by the following command.
  • Page 444 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 13 Fixed Cycle 13.3 Compound Type Fixed Cycle for Turning Machining Detailed description (1) The F, S and T commands in the finished shape program are valid during the finishing cycle. (2) When the G70 cycle is finished, the tool returns to the start point at a rapid traverse and the next block is read. (Example 1) When a sequence No.
  • Page 445 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 13 Fixed Cycle 13.3 Compound Type Fixed Cycle for Turning Machining 13.3.5 Face Cut-off Cycle; G74 Function and purpose The G74 fixed cycle automatically performs grooving in the face direction of the workpiece by commanding the co- ordinates of the groove end point, cut amount, cutter shift amount and cutter escape at the bottom of the cut.
  • Page 446 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 13 Fixed Cycle 13.3 Compound Type Fixed Cycle for Turning Machining Detailed description (1) When X/U and P are omitted or when the values of "x" and "i" are zero, operation will apply to the Z axis only. Note that when there is an Rd command and no sign, the tool will escape at the bottom of the cut.
  • Page 447 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 13 Fixed Cycle 13.3 Compound Type Fixed Cycle for Turning Machining 13.3.6 Longitudinal Cut-off Cycle; G75 Function and purpose The G75 fixed cycle automatically performs grooving in the longitudinal direction of the workpiece by commanding the coordinates of the groove end point, cut amount, cutter shift amount and cutter escape at the bottom of the cut.
  • Page 448 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 13 Fixed Cycle 13.3 Compound Type Fixed Cycle for Turning Machining Note (1) A reversible parameter enables to use parameter setting value without issuing a program command and also, the value can be changed by the program command. Detailed description (1) When Z/W and Q are omitted or when the values of "z"...
  • Page 449 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 13 Fixed Cycle 13.3 Compound Type Fixed Cycle for Turning Machining 13.3.7 Compound Type Thread Cutting Cycle; G76 Function and purpose The G76 fixed cycle enables to cut the workpiece at a desired angle by designating the thread cutting start point and end point, and it automatically performs cutting so that the cutting cross section (cutting torque) per cutting pass is constant.
  • Page 450 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 13 Fixed Cycle 13.3 Compound Type Fixed Cycle for Turning Machining Note (1) A reversible parameter enables to use parameter setting value without issuing a program command and also, the value can be changed by the program command. (2) The two G76 commands above cannot be assembled in a block.
  • Page 451 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 13 Fixed Cycle 13.3 Compound Type Fixed Cycle for Turning Machining [When Ri is positive] a /2 [Cut amount] K: Thread height d : Finishing allowance (cut "m" times) (1) to (n) : 1st cutting to nth cutting IB-1501619-H...
  • Page 452 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 13 Fixed Cycle 13.3 Compound Type Fixed Cycle for Turning Machining Interrupt operation (1) When the feed hold button is pressed during thread cutting, an automatic operation will stop upon completion of a block without thread cutting. (The automatic operation pause lamp turns on immediately and it goes off when automatic operation stops.) If feed hold is applied when thread cutting is not executed, or when the thread cutting command is issued but the axis is yet to move, the automatic operation pause lamp will turn on, and the automatic operation will pause.
  • Page 453 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 13 Fixed Cycle 13.3 Compound Type Fixed Cycle for Turning Machining Program example 30.0 1.5 1 32.0 24.0 46.0 (R) Rapid traverse (f) Cutting feed G76 P011560 R0.2 ; G76 U-28.0 W-46.0 R-9.0 P6.0 Q3.5 F4.0 ; Precautions Refer to "13.3.10 Precautions for Compound Type Fixed Cycle for Turning Machining (G70 to G76)".
  • Page 454 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 13 Fixed Cycle 13.3 Compound Type Fixed Cycle for Turning Machining 13.3.8 Selecting Finished Shape Program Search Method When G71, G72 or G73 is commanded Selects the search method of the finished shape program to be called with G71, G72 or G73 command. The search method is set in the parameter "#1270 ext06/bit2".
  • Page 455 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 13 Fixed Cycle 13.3 Compound Type Fixed Cycle for Turning Machining If the finished shape program is in the program specified with "A", the start sequence No. is searched from the top of the program specified with "A". The search is executed until EOR. O1() G00 T0101;...
  • Page 456 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 13 Fixed Cycle 13.3 Compound Type Fixed Cycle for Turning Machining When the start sequence Nos. are overlapped (rough cutting 1 -> finishing 1 -> rough cutting 2 -> finishing 2) (a) The start sequence No. N10 of the finished shape pro- O1() gram (1) with G71.
  • Page 457 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 13 Fixed Cycle 13.3 Compound Type Fixed Cycle for Turning Machining 13.3.9 Tool Shape Compensation for Turning The area where the tool can machine is limited depending on the tool shape. Therefore, when machining is per- formed out of the area, interference between tool and workpiece may occur, which may result in damage.
  • Page 458 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 13 Fixed Cycle 13.3 Compound Type Fixed Cycle for Turning Machining The available range of side-cutting-edge angle and end-cutting-edge angle is as below. 0° < side-cutting-edge angle ≤ 90° The available range of cutting-edge is judged for side-cutting-edge angle and end-cutting-edge angle respectively. If the cutting-edge angle is outside the available range, the cutting-edge angle compensation outside the available range is not performed.
  • Page 459 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 13 Fixed Cycle 13.3 Compound Type Fixed Cycle for Turning Machining If G02 or G03 command is used for the finished shape, G01 command block may be inserted with the cutting-edge angle compensation. If the finished shape exceeds 200 blocks including the insertion block, the program error (P202) occurs.
  • Page 460 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 13 Fixed Cycle 13.3 Compound Type Fixed Cycle for Turning Machining Cutting-edge angle compensation when G70 is commanded The cutting-edge angle can also be compensated with G70 command (finishing cycle). When the cutting-edge angle compensation is performed with G70 command, specify the tool feed direction (not specified, longitudinal, face) with H address to select a direction of the cutting-edge angle compensation.
  • Page 461 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 13 Fixed Cycle 13.3 Compound Type Fixed Cycle for Turning Machining 13.3.10 Precautions for Compound Type Fixed Cycle for Turning Machining (G70 to G76) Precautions (1) Command all required parameters in a compound type fixed cycle for turning machining command block. (2) Provided that the finished shape program is registered in the memory, compound type fixed cycle for turning ma- chining I commands can be executed in the memory, MDI or tape mode.
  • Page 462 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 13 Fixed Cycle 13.3 Compound Type Fixed Cycle for Turning Machining (12) The next block after the completion of the G70 command is the next block of the command block. N100 ..; N200 ..
  • Page 463 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 13 Fixed Cycle 13.3 Compound Type Fixed Cycle for Turning Machining (22) With the cutting-edge angle compensation, as the finished shape is compensated according to the set cutting- edge angle, the machining surface and the cutting-edge are in contact. Depending on the depth of cutting, the discharge of cutting chips may become worse and scratches may be on the machining surface.
  • Page 464 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 13 Fixed Cycle 13.4 Compound Type Fixed Cycle for Turning Machining (MITSUBISHI CNC Special Format) ; G71, G73, G74, G76 13.4 Compound Type Fixed Cycle for Turning Machining (MITSUBISHI CNC Special Format) ; G71, G73, G74, G76 Function and purpose This function enables to perform a prepared fixed cycle by commanding a program in a block.
  • Page 465 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 13 Fixed Cycle 13.4 Compound Type Fixed Cycle for Turning Machining (MITSUBISHI CNC Special Format) ; G71, G73, G74, G76 Face cut-off cycle, longitudinal cut-off cycle G74 X (U)__ Z (W)__ I__ K__ F__ D__ ; X (U) X axis slotting end point coordinate Z (W)
  • Page 466 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 13 Fixed Cycle 13.4 Compound Type Fixed Cycle for Turning Machining (MITSUBISHI CNC Special Format) ; G71, G73, G74, G76 Detailed description Check of command format This checks whether the normal command format is being used with the MITSUBISHI CNC special format. [When normal format is selected ("#1265 ext01/bit0"...
  • Page 467 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 13 Fixed Cycle 13.4 Compound Type Fixed Cycle for Turning Machining (MITSUBISHI CNC Special Format) ; G71, G73, G74, G76 Function MITSUBISHI CNC Normal format Difference from normal format special format Face cut-off Cy- G74 X Z I K F D;or (1) G74 R;...
  • Page 468 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 13 Fixed Cycle 13.4 Compound Type Fixed Cycle for Turning Machining (MITSUBISHI CNC Special Format) ; G71, G73, G74, G76 Zigzag thread cutting [For specific models only (Not available for M8V Series)] By commanding P2 in the G76 block of the compound thread cutting cycle, zigzag thread cutting with a constant cut amount can be performed.
  • Page 469 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 13 Fixed Cycle 13.4 Compound Type Fixed Cycle for Turning Machining (MITSUBISHI CNC Special Format) ; G71, G73, G74, G76 [Cut amount] a : Thread angle k : Thread height d : Finishing allowance (Set by "#8057 LAST-D") (Number of finish cuts are set by "#8058 TIMES") The cut amount increases at a set rate.
  • Page 470 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 13 Fixed Cycle 13.5 Fixed Cycle for Drilling 13.5 Fixed Cycle for Drilling Function and purpose These fixed cycles are used to perform prepared working sequences of machining programs such as positioning, hole drilling, boring and tapping in a block. When performing a same machining repeatedly, it can be executed by commanding only the axis position.
  • Page 471 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 13 Fixed Cycle 13.5 Fixed Cycle for Drilling For the longitudinal hole drilling axis selection function (Type II), refer to the table below in addition to the above table. G code Longitudinal hole drilling axis Hole drilling axis Usage selection signal ON/OFF...
  • Page 472 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 13 Fixed Cycle 13.5 Fixed Cycle for Drilling The hole drilling axes and the positioning for the fixed cycle for drilling are shown in the outline drawing below. (I) Initial point (R) R point (1) G83 Xx1 Cc1 Zz1 Rr1 Qq1 Pp1 Ff1 Kk1 ;...
  • Page 473 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 13 Fixed Cycle 13.5 Fixed Cycle for Drilling Detailed description Basic operations of fixed cycle for drilling The actual operation consists of the following seven movements. (I) Initial point (R) R point (1) This denotes the positioning (by rapid traverse) to the X (Z) and C axis initial point. If ",I"...
  • Page 474 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 13 Fixed Cycle 13.5 Fixed Cycle for Drilling 13.5.1 Face Deep Hole Drilling Cycle 1 (Longitudinal Deep Hole Drilling Cycle 1) ; G83 (G87) Command format Face deep hole drilling cycle 1 G83 X/U__ C/H__ Z/W__ Rr Qq Pp Ff Kk Mm Dd Ee Jj ,Kk2 ; X/U C/H Designation of hole position initial point (absolute/incremental position) Data for positioning X and C axes...
  • Page 475 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 13 Fixed Cycle 13.5 Fixed Cycle for Drilling Precautions (1) For the longitudinal deep hole drilling cycle 1 (G87), designate Z/W to the hole position initial point and X/U to the hole bottom position. (2) The designation of the hole position initial point is non-modal.
  • Page 476 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 13 Fixed Cycle 13.5 Fixed Cycle for Drilling Detailed description When the Q command is issued (deep hole drilling) (Ma) (Mb),(Pb) (Pa) (1) Retract amount "d" is set by the parameter “#8013 G83 n”. The tool returns at rapid traverse. (2) When the cutting reduction amount "j"...
  • Page 477 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 13 Fixed Cycle 13.5 Fixed Cycle for Drilling 13.5.2 Face Tapping Cycle (Longitudinal Tapping Cycle) / Face Reverse Tapping Cycle (Longitudinal Reverse Tapping Cycle); G84 (G88)/G84.1 (G88.1) Command format Face tapping cycle G84(G84.1) X/U__ C/H__ Z/W__ Rr1 Pp Ff(Ee) Kk Dd Ss1 ,Ss2 ,Rr2 Mm Jj ,Kk2 ; G84(G84.1) G84 Face tapping cycle mode G84.1 Face tapping cycle mode (the tap rotation direction is reversed)
  • Page 478 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 13 Fixed Cycle 13.5 Fixed Cycle for Drilling Longitudinal tapping cycle G88(G88.1) Z/W__ C/H__ X/U__ Rr1 Pp Ff(Ee) Kk Dd Ss1 ,Ss2 ,Rr2 Mm Jj ,Kk2 ; G88(G88.1) G88 Longitudinal tapping cycle mode G88.1 Longitudinal reverse tapping cycle mode (the tap rotation direction is reversed) Z/W C/H Designation of hole position initial point (absolute/incremental position)
  • Page 479 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 13 Fixed Cycle 13.5 Fixed Cycle for Drilling Pecking tapping cycle/deep-hole tapping cycle G84(G88, G84.1, G88.1) X/U__ C/H__ Z/W__ Rr1 Qq Ff (Ee) Pp Ss1 ,Ss2 ,Ii ,Jj ,Rr2 Dd Kk Mm Jj2 ,Kk2 ; G84(G88, G84.1, G84 Face tapping cycle mode G88.1)
  • Page 480 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 13 Fixed Cycle 13.5 Fixed Cycle for Drilling Caution (1) The designation of the hole position initial point is unmodal. When tapping cycle command is to be executed con- tinuously, designate them block by block. (2) If a value other than zero is specified to address Q when the specification for Pecking tapping cycle/Deep-hole tapping cycle is valid, either pecking or deep-hole tapping cycle is executed instead of normal tapping cycle.
  • Page 481 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 13 Fixed Cycle 13.5 Fixed Cycle for Drilling Detailed description Normal tapping cycle (When Q is not designated) (Pa) (Ma) (Mb),(Pb) (Ma) The M code (Mm) is output when there is a C-axis clamping M code command (Mm). (Mb) The C-axis unclamping M code (C-axis clamp M code + 1 = Mm + 1) is output when there is a C- axis clamping M code command (Mm).
  • Page 482 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 13 Fixed Cycle 13.5 Fixed Cycle for Drilling Pecking Tapping Cycle (When the Q command is designated #1272 ext08/bit4=0) In deep-hole tapping, the load applied to the tool can be reduced by designating the depth of cut per pass and cutting the workpiece by a multiple number of times.
  • Page 483 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 13 Fixed Cycle 13.5 Fixed Cycle for Drilling (7) If the command value of F becomes extremely small such as around "F < 0.01 mm/rev" during synchronous tap- ping, the spindle does not rotate smoothly. So make sure to command a value larger than 0.01 mm/rev. The unit of F can be selected between mm/rev and mm/min.
  • Page 484 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 13 Fixed Cycle 13.5 Fixed Cycle for Drilling (6) Whether to set the reverse tapping cycle G codes to G84.1/G88.1 or G84/G88 (address D value is minus) is de- termined according to the MTB specifications. (parameter "#1309 Gtype"). (7) If the command value of F becomes extremely small such as around "F <...
  • Page 485 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 13 Fixed Cycle 13.5 Fixed Cycle for Drilling The selection of synchronous and asynchronous tapping by the three items above will follow the combination shown below. Combination Program command (,R0/1) No command #8159 Synchronous tap M function code (M**) ×...
  • Page 486 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 13 Fixed Cycle 13.5 Fixed Cycle for Drilling Spindle acceleration/deceleration pattern during synchronous tapping This function enables to make spindle acceleration/deceleration pattern closer to that of the speed loop by dividing the spindle and drilling axis acceleration/deceleration pattern into up to three stages during synchronous tapping. The acceleration/deceleration pattern can be set up to three stages for each gear.
  • Page 487 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 13 Fixed Cycle 13.5 Fixed Cycle for Drilling (2) When synchronous tapping changeover spindle rotation speed 2 < spindle rotation speed during return S(S1) S'(S3) Command spindle rotation speed Spindle rotation speed during return Tapping rotation speed (spindle specification parameters #3013 to #3016) Synchronous tapping changeover spindle rotation speed 2 (spindle specification parameters #3037 to #3040)
  • Page 488 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 13 Fixed Cycle 13.5 Fixed Cycle for Drilling Synchronous tapping in-position check (Parameter setting values and tapping axis movement) #1223 aux07 "P" designation of G84/G74 command In-position check during syn- chronous tapping bit3 bit4 bit5 bit2...
  • Page 489 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 13 Fixed Cycle 13.5 Fixed Cycle for Drilling In-position width and tapping axis movement for a synchronous tapping in-position check (R) (d) (F) Speed (T): Time (Z) Hole bottom (R) R point (a) In-position completion of the G00 feed from the R point (b) G01 deceleration start at tapping cut-in (c) G01 deceleration start at tapping return (d) Start of G00 feed to the R point...
  • Page 490 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 13 Fixed Cycle 13.5 Fixed Cycle for Drilling Relation between the parameter setting values and tapping axis movement for a synchronous tapping in- position check #1223 aux07 Hole bottom wait time Operation at hole Operation at R Operation at I bottom...
  • Page 491 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 13 Fixed Cycle 13.5 Fixed Cycle for Drilling Relationship between synchronous tapping and other functions (1) Spindle synchronization I / Spindle synchronization II / Tool spindle synchronization IA or Tool spindle synchro- nization IB (spindle-spindle polygon machining) / Tool spindle synchronization II (hobbing) The synchronous tapping spindle cannot be commanded as the reference or synchronized spindle using the functions above.
  • Page 492 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 13 Fixed Cycle 13.5 Fixed Cycle for Drilling [Precautions and restrictions] (1) The manual synchronous tapping is only required in the handle mode. (2) If necessary, you can perform the manual synchronous tapping using the handle after switching to another op- eration mode until it is reset or canceled with the G80 command.
  • Page 493 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 13 Fixed Cycle 13.5 Fixed Cycle for Drilling [Precautions] (1) The pecking tapping cycle or deep-hole tapping cycle cannot be commanded while the analog spindle synchro- nous tapping is used. If commanded, the program error (P182) occurs. (2) The synchronous tap with multi-step acceleration deceleration cannot be used while the analog spindle synchro- nous tapping is used.
  • Page 494 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 13 Fixed Cycle 13.5 Fixed Cycle for Drilling (5) The synchronous tapping error display function is disabled for the synchronous tapping using the pulse-train out- put spindle, and the synchronous tapping error display always shows "0". (6) If the reset or emergency stop is performed during the synchronous tapping using the pulse-train output spindle, the controller stops outputting pulse signals to the spindle.
  • Page 495 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 13 Fixed Cycle 13.5 Fixed Cycle for Drilling 13.5.3 Face Boring Cycle (Longitudinal Boring Cycle) ; G85 (G89) Command format Face boring cycle mode G85 X/U__ C/H__ Z/W__ Rr Pp Ff Kk Mm ; X/U C/H Designation of hole position initial point (absolute/incremental position) Designation of hole bottom position (absolute/incremental position from R point) (modal)
  • Page 496 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 13 Fixed Cycle 13.5 Fixed Cycle for Drilling Detailed description (Pa) (Ma) (Mb),(Pb) (1) See "Face Deep Hole Drilling Cycle 1; G83" for details on (Ma),(Mb),(Pa),(Pb). (2) The tool returns to the R point at a cutting feed rate which is double the designated feed rate command. However, it does not exceed the maximum cutting feed rate.
  • Page 497 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 13 Fixed Cycle 13.5 Fixed Cycle for Drilling 13.5.4 Deep Hole Drilling Cycle 2; G83.2 Function and purpose The deep hole drilling cycle 2 drills deep holes in the X-axis or Z-axis direction by commanding the X or Z coordinate of the end point and the cut amount at cutting feed.
  • Page 498 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 13 Fixed Cycle 13.5 Fixed Cycle for Drilling Q : Dwell time at cut point J : Dwell time at return point With single block operation, block stops upon completion of the deep hole drilling cycle 2 commands. IB-1501619-H...
  • Page 499 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 13 Fixed Cycle 13.5 Fixed Cycle for Drilling Detailed description (1) When the axis address of the hole drilling axes is commanded several times in a block, the last address will be valid. (2) A program error (P33) will occur in the following commands.
  • Page 500 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 13 Fixed Cycle 13.5 Fixed Cycle for Drilling 13.5.5 Thread Milling Cycle; G187 Function and purpose This function is a fixed cycle that performs thread machining by helicoidally operating the tool referred to as a thread milling tool.
  • Page 501 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 13 Fixed Cycle 13.5 Fixed Cycle for Drilling Detailed description Detailed address setting Address Command range Remarks (unit) Designate the hole bottom position. -99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm) If an axis other than the drilling axis is commanded or the address is omitted, a program error (P33) will occur.
  • Page 502 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 13 Fixed Cycle 13.5 Fixed Cycle for Drilling Operation example The thread milling cycle runs as shown below. (1) The axis moves (approaches) with G01 from the center of the hole to the radius direction. (2) If the dwell time is designated, dwelling is performed.
  • Page 503 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 13 Fixed Cycle 13.5 Fixed Cycle for Drilling Relationship between plane selection and drilling axis The drilling axis is determined by plane selection (G17, G18, or G19). The axis (X, Y, Z, or its parallel axis) vertical to the plane designated in G17, G18, or G19 is used as the drilling axis. The setting of the parameter "#1080 Dril_Z"...
  • Page 504 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 13 Fixed Cycle 13.5 Fixed Cycle for Drilling 13.5.6 Hole Edge Chamfering Cycle; G185 Function and purpose This function is a fixed cycle that chamfers the hole made on the longitudinal surface of the cylindrical workpiece. By using this function, it is possible to perform chamfering with the ball end mill without using a special tool such as a chamfering tool.
  • Page 505 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 13 Fixed Cycle 13.5 Fixed Cycle for Drilling Command format G185 Z/W__ C/H__ R__ D__ Q__ P__ J__ F__ K__ A__ E__ ; Z/WC/H Designation of the hole position (absolute/incremental position) Designation of the R point position Cylindrical surface hole radius Cylindrical workpiece radius Chamfering width...
  • Page 506 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 13 Fixed Cycle 13.5 Fixed Cycle for Drilling Address Command range Content of address (unit) Digits after the decimal point are ignored. 0 to 9999 (times) If the command is omitted, it is regarded that "K1" is commanded. When "K0" is commanded, the hole machining data are stored in memory;...
  • Page 507 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 13 Fixed Cycle 13.5 Fixed Cycle for Drilling Chamfering command method The chamfering command method can be selected from the following three patterns depending on the setting con- dition of the pick feed amount "A" and the chamfering count "E". Setting condition Chamfering command method Pick feed amount...
  • Page 508 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 13 Fixed Cycle 13.5 Fixed Cycle for Drilling Details of operation The hole edge chamfering cycle runs as shown below. G185 Zz__ Cc__ Rr__ D__ Q__ P__ J__ F__ K__ Aa__ Ee__ ; Perform the positioning (by rapid traverse) to the hole position.
  • Page 509 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 13 Fixed Cycle 13.5 Fixed Cycle for Drilling Program example Perform chamfering (1 mm) on the hole of φ8 mm made in the cylindrical workpiece of φ40 mm. Other conditions are as follows. Tool used: Ball end mill R3 X axis: Diameter value command (The parameter "#1019 dia"...
  • Page 510 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 13 Fixed Cycle 13.5 Fixed Cycle for Drilling Precautions (1) Perform the hole edge chamfering cycle for perfect circle holes. (2) When performing the hole edge chamfering cycle, use the ball end mill as the tool. (3) The hole edge chamfering cycle is applicable to the axis configuration for a lathe of X axis, Z axis, and C axis (2 axes + 1 rotary axis) or a lathe of X axis, Z axis, C axis, and Y axis (3 axes + 1 rotary axis).
  • Page 511 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 13 Fixed Cycle 13.5 Fixed Cycle for Drilling 13.5.7 Fixed Cycle for Drilling Cancel; G80 Detailed description This cancels the fixed cycle for drilling and the hole edge chamfering cycle (G185). The hole machining mode and hole machining data are both canceled.
  • Page 512 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 13 Fixed Cycle 13.5 Fixed Cycle for Drilling 13.5.8 Precautions When Using a Fixed Cycle for Drilling Precautions (1) When G84 or G88 fixed cycle is commanded, the rotary tool must be rotated to the specified direction beforehand by miscellaneous functions (M3, M4).
  • Page 513 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 13 Fixed Cycle 13.5 Fixed Cycle for Drilling 13.5.9 Initial Point and R Point Level Return; G98, G99 Function and purpose Whether to use R point or initial level as the return level in the final sequence of the fixed cycle can be selected. Command format G98;...
  • Page 514 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 13 Fixed Cycle 13.5 Fixed Cycle for Drilling 13.5.10 Setting of Workpiece Coordinates in Fixed Cycle Mode Function and purpose The designated axis moves in the workpiece coordinate system set for the axis. The Z axis becomes valid from the R point positioning after positioning is completed or from Z axis movement.
  • Page 515 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 13 Fixed Cycle 13.5 Fixed Cycle for Drilling 13.5.11 Drilling Cycle High-Speed Retract Function and purpose This function retracts the drill from the hole bottom at high speed in drilling machining. This helps extending the drill life by reducing the time of drilling in vain at hole bottom.
  • Page 516 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 13 Fixed Cycle 13.5 Fixed Cycle for Drilling Detailed description (1) When "#8123 H-spd retract ON" is ON, the tool is retracted from the hole bottom at high speed using the lost motion compensation function. (a) Set the lost motion compensation type 2 or 3 to the servo parameter.
  • Page 517 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 13 Fixed Cycle 13.5 Fixed Cycle for Drilling 13.5.12 Acceleration/Deceleration Mode Change in The Fixed Cycle for Drilling Function and purpose This function switches the acceleration/deceleration mode for fixed cycle for drilling between the constant-gradient method and the acceleration/deceleration after interpolation.
  • Page 518 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 13 Fixed Cycle 13.5 Fixed Cycle for Drilling Operation example Operation example of "acceleration/deceleration mode change in the fixed cycle for drilling" being enabled The below illustrates the processes of hole-bottom deceleration check of a drilling axis following the parameter "#19417 Hole dec check 2"...
  • Page 519 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 13 Fixed Cycle 13.5 Fixed Cycle for Drilling 13.5.13 Chip Removal Function and purpose The chip removal function removes chips that have adhered to the tool during fixed cycle hole drilling by reversing the spindle.
  • Page 520 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 13 Fixed Cycle 13.5 Fixed Cycle for Drilling Modal specifications for address D and address E (1) If address D is not commanded, the reversal spindle commanded previously with address D is inherited. If the same address D as the previous one is commanded, the same operation is performed.
  • Page 521 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 13 Fixed Cycle 13.5 Fixed Cycle for Drilling Detailed description Operation conditions The target fixed cycles are G83, G87, and G83.2. To perform chip removal, it is necessary to set the command address D (reversal spindle number), command ad- dress E (reversal frequency), and parameter "#8100 Chip removal speed".
  • Page 522 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 13 Fixed Cycle 13.5 Fixed Cycle for Drilling The chip removal operation during the final drilling (1) The spindle reverse operation starts at the initial point after the final drilling or the R point, and waits until the spindle speed reaches the commanded speed set in the parameter "#8100 Chip removal speed".
  • Page 523 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 13 Fixed Cycle 13.5 Fixed Cycle for Drilling Restrictions (1) Even if multiple spindles are selected at the same time in combination with multiple spindle control II or multiple- axis synchronization control, only the spindle specified with the D command for chip removal is reversed. During the chip removal operation, multiple spindles are not reversed at the same time.
  • Page 524 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 13 Fixed Cycle 13.5 Fixed Cycle for Drilling 13.5.14 Cutting Reduction Amount Specification Method Function and purpose Hole drilling can be performed by specifying the cutting reduction amount while the depth of cut in each cutting op- eration (step) is reduced in the fixed cycle where the cutting amount per time is specified and the workpiece is cut multiple times till the bottom of the hole.
  • Page 525 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 13 Fixed Cycle 13.5 Fixed Cycle for Drilling Detailed description The following two methods are valid depending on the cutting reduction amount and the minimum cutting amount. (1) Cutting amount specification method (2) Cutting amount reduction method Specify the cut depth for the first step and the second Specify the cutting reduction amount for the second and subsequent steps.
  • Page 526 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 13 Fixed Cycle 13.5 Fixed Cycle for Drilling Operation example The following example shows how the cutting amount reduction method operates in the G83 deep-hole drilling cycle. G83 Xx1 Zz1 Rr1 Qq1 Ff1 Jj1 ,Kk1; (10) (n - 1) Operation pattern...
  • Page 527 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 13 Fixed Cycle 13.6 Fixed Cycle for Drilling (MITSUBISHI CNC Special Format) 13.6 Fixed Cycle for Drilling (MITSUBISHI CNC Special Format) Function and purpose These fixed cycles are used to perform prepared sequences of machining programs, such as positioning, hole drill- ing, boring and tapping in one block.
  • Page 528 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 13 Fixed Cycle 13.6 Fixed Cycle for Drilling (MITSUBISHI CNC Special Format) Detailed description Positioning plane and hole drilling axis The fixed cycle has basic control elements for the positioning plane and hole drilling axis. The positioning plane is determined by the G17, G18 and G19 plane selection command, and the hole drilling axis is the axis perpendicular (X, Y, Z or their parallel axis) to the above plane.
  • Page 529 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 13 Fixed Cycle 13.6 Fixed Cycle for Drilling (MITSUBISHI CNC Special Format) In-position check in fixed cycle When L (number of repetitions) is designated two or more times in the fixed cycle, the commanded in-position width will be valid in the repetition block (5) to (8) below.
  • Page 530 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 13 Fixed Cycle 13.6 Fixed Cycle for Drilling (MITSUBISHI CNC Special Format) 13.6.1 Drilling Cycle, Spot Drilling Cycle ; G81 Command format G81 Xx1(U) Zz1(W) Rr1 Ff1 Ll1 ,Ii1 ,Jj1 ; Drilling cycle mode, spot drilling cycle mode Xx1(U) Designation of hole position initial point (absolute/incremental position) Zz1(W)
  • Page 531 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 13 Fixed Cycle 13.6 Fixed Cycle for Drilling (MITSUBISHI CNC Special Format) 13.6.2 Drilling Cycle, Counter Boring Cycle ; G82 Command format G82 Xx1(U) Zz1(W) Rr1 Ff1 Pp1 Ll1 ,Ii1 ,Jj1 ; Drilling cycle mode, counter boring cycle mode Xx1(U) Designation of hole position initial point (absolute/incremental position) Zz1(W)
  • Page 532 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 13 Fixed Cycle 13.6 Fixed Cycle for Drilling (MITSUBISHI CNC Special Format) 13.6.3 Deep Hole Drilling Cycle; G83 Command format G83 Xx1(U) Zz1(W) Rr1 Qq1 Pp1 Ff1 Ll1 ,Ii1 ,Jj1 Jj2 ,Kk1 ; Deep hole drilling cycle mode Xx1(U) Designation of hole position initial point (absolute/incremental position)
  • Page 533 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 13 Fixed Cycle 13.6 Fixed Cycle for Drilling (MITSUBISHI CNC Special Format) Detailed description (10) (n)-1 (n)-2 “m” will differ according to the parameter "#8013 G83 n". Program so that “q1 > m”. Operation pattern Program Valid...
  • Page 534 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 13 Fixed Cycle 13.6 Fixed Cycle for Drilling (MITSUBISHI CNC Special Format) 13.6.4 Stepping Cycle; G83.1 Command format G83.1 Xx1(U) Zz1(W) Qq1 Rr1 Ff1 Pp1 Ll1 ,Ii1 ,Jj1 Jj2 ,Kk1 ; G83.1 Stepping cycle mode Xx1(U) Designation of hole position initial point (absolute/incremental position) Zz1(W)
  • Page 535 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 13 Fixed Cycle 13.6 Fixed Cycle for Drilling (MITSUBISHI CNC Special Format) Detailed description (n)-1 Operation pattern Program Valid G00 Xx1; Invalid G00 Zr1; Invalid G01 Zq1 Ff1; G04 Pp1; Invalid G00 Z-m; Invalid G01 Z(q1+m) Ff1;...
  • Page 536 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 13 Fixed Cycle 13.6 Fixed Cycle for Drilling (MITSUBISHI CNC Special Format) 13.6.5 Tapping Cycle; G84 Command format G84 Xx1(U) Zz1(W) Rr1 Qq1 Ff1 Pp1 Ll1 ,Ii1 ,Jj1 Jj2 ,Kk1 ; Tapping cycle mode Xx1(U) Designation of hole position initial point (absolute/incremental position) Zz1(W)
  • Page 537 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 13 Fixed Cycle 13.6 Fixed Cycle for Drilling (MITSUBISHI CNC Special Format) Detailed description Normal tapping cycle (When Q is not designated) Operation pattern Program Valid G00 Xx1; Invalid G00 Zr1; Invalid G01 Zq1 Ff1; G04 Pp1;...
  • Page 538 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 13 Fixed Cycle 13.6 Fixed Cycle for Drilling (MITSUBISHI CNC Special Format) Pecking tapping cycle (When the Q command is designated #1272 ext08/bit4=0) x1,c1 (n1) (n2) (n5) (n3) (n4) (n6) (n7) Operation pattern Program Valid G00 Xx1 Cc1 ,Ii1;...
  • Page 539 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 13 Fixed Cycle 13.6 Fixed Cycle for Drilling (MITSUBISHI CNC Special Format) During the G84 modal, the "Tapping" NC output signal will be output. When the command value of Q is "0", this command is treated as a normal tapping cycle. Deep-hole tapping cycle (When the Q command is designated #1272 ext08/bit4=1) x1,c1 (n1)
  • Page 540 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 13 Fixed Cycle 13.6 Fixed Cycle for Drilling (MITSUBISHI CNC Special Format) When G84 is being executed, the override will be canceled and the override will automatically be set to 100%. The override set in the parameter "#1172 tapovr" is also disabled. Dry run is valid when for a positioning command the parameter "#1085 G00 DRY RUN"...
  • Page 541 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 13 Fixed Cycle 13.6 Fixed Cycle for Drilling (MITSUBISHI CNC Special Format) 13.6.6 Synchronous Tapping Cycle ; G84.2 Command format G84.2 Xx1(U) Zz1(W) Rr1 Qq1 Ff1 Pp1 Ll1 Ss1 ,Ss2 ,Ii1 ,Jj1 Jj2 ,Kk1 ; G84.2 Synchronous tapping cycle mode Xx1(U)
  • Page 542 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 13 Fixed Cycle 13.6 Fixed Cycle for Drilling (MITSUBISHI CNC Special Format) Detailed description Normal tapping cycle (When Q is not designated) Operation pattern Program Valid G00 Xx1; Invalid G00 Zr1; Invalid G01 Zq1 Ff1; G04 Pp1;...
  • Page 543 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 13 Fixed Cycle 13.6 Fixed Cycle for Drilling (MITSUBISHI CNC Special Format) The feedrates for tapping retract are as follows. Address Meaning of ad- Command range Remarks dress (unit) Spindle rotation 0 to 99999 (r/min) The data is held as modal information. speed during return If the value of ",S"...
  • Page 544 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 13 Fixed Cycle 13.6 Fixed Cycle for Drilling (MITSUBISHI CNC Special Format) Operation pattern Program (n5) G04 Pp1; (n6) (n7) Valid G00 Z-r1 ,Ij1; G98 mode No movement G99 mode When the cutting reduction amount "j2" or the minimum cutting amount "k1" is specified, the cutting reduction amount specification method is used.
  • Page 545 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 13 Fixed Cycle 13.6 Fixed Cycle for Drilling (MITSUBISHI CNC Special Format) Operation pattern Program (n3) (n4) Invalid G01 Z-z1 Ff1; (n5) G04 Pp1; (n6) (n7) Valid G00 Z-r1; G98 mode No movement G99 mode When the cutting reduction amount "j2"...
  • Page 546 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 13 Fixed Cycle 13.6 Fixed Cycle for Drilling (MITSUBISHI CNC Special Format) 13.6.7 Boring Cycle ; G85 Command format G85 Xx1(U) Zz1(W) Rr1 Ff1 Ll1 ,Ii1 ,Jj1 ; Boring cycle mode Xx1(U) Designation of hole position initial point (absolute/incremental position) Zz1(W) Designation of hole bottom position (absolute/incremental position from R point) Designation of R point (incremental position from initial point) (sign ignored)
  • Page 547 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 13 Fixed Cycle 13.6 Fixed Cycle for Drilling (MITSUBISHI CNC Special Format) 13.6.8 Boring Cycle ; G89 Command format G89 Xx1(U) Zz1(W) Rr1 Ff1 Pp1 Ll1 ,Ii1 ,Jj1 ; Boring cycle mode Xx1(U) Designation of hole position initial point (absolute/incremental position) Zz1(W) Designation of hole bottom position (absolute/incremental position from R point)
  • Page 548 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 13 Fixed Cycle 13.6 Fixed Cycle for Drilling (MITSUBISHI CNC Special Format) 13.6.9 Hole Edge Chamfering Cycle; G185 Refer to "13.5.6 Hole Edge Chamfering Cycle; G185". 13.6.10 Cutting Reduction Amount Specification Method Refer to "13.5.14 Cutting Reduction Amount Specification Method". The target functions are as follows.
  • Page 549 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 13 Fixed Cycle 13.6 Fixed Cycle for Drilling (MITSUBISHI CNC Special Format) 13.6.11 Precautions on Using The Fixed Cycle for Drilling (MITSUBISHI CNC Special Format) Precautions (1) Before commanding the fixed cycle, the spindle must be rotated to a specific direction by a miscellaneous func- tion (M3 or M4).
  • Page 550 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 13 Fixed Cycle 13.6 Fixed Cycle for Drilling (MITSUBISHI CNC Special Format) (13) If gradients of the 2nd and 3rd acceleration/deceleration stages according to the spindle rotation speed and time constants set in the parameters are each steeper than the previous stage's gradients, the previous stage's gradient will be valid.
  • Page 551 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 13 Fixed Cycle 13.6 Fixed Cycle for Drilling (MITSUBISHI CNC Special Format) IB-1501619-H...
  • Page 552 Macro Functions IB-1501619-H...
  • Page 553 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 14 Macro Functions 14.1 Subprogram Control; M98, M99, M198 14Macro Functions 14.1 Subprogram Control; M98, M99, M198 14.1.1 Subprogram Call; M98, M99 Function and purpose Fixed sequences or repeatedly used parameters can be stored in the memory as subprograms that can then be called from the main program when required.
  • Page 554 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 14 Macro Functions 14.1 Subprogram Control; M98, M99, M198 Command format Subprogram call M98 P__ H__ L__ ,D__ ; M98 <file name> H__ L__ ,D__ ; Program number in subprogram to be called (own program if omitted) Note that P can be omitted only for memory mode operation (NC memory, NC memory 2, high-speed program server, SD card, hard disk or USB), and MDI operation.
  • Page 555 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 14 Macro Functions 14.1 Subprogram Control; M98, M99, M198 Detailed description Creating and registering subprograms Subprograms have the same format as machining programs for normal memory mode, except that the subprogram completion instruction "M99 (P_);" must be commanded alone in the last block. O******** ;...
  • Page 556 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 14 Macro Functions 14.1 Subprogram Control; M98, M99, M198 Program example Program example 1 When there are 3 subprogram calls (known as 3 nesting levels) Main program Subprogram 1 Subprogram 2 Subprogram 3 O10;...
  • Page 557 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 14 Macro Functions 14.1 Subprogram Control; M98, M99, M198 Precautions (1) The program error (P232) will occur when the designated P (program No.) cannot be found. (2) The M98 P_ ; M99 ; block does not perform a single block stop. If any address except O, N, P, L or H is used, single block stop can be executed.
  • Page 558 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 14 Macro Functions 14.1 Subprogram Control; M98, M99, M198 (b) Without designation of device No. A subprogram with O No. is searched according to the settings of #8890 (D0 in order of subprogram search) to #8894 (D4 in order of subprogram search).
  • Page 559 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 14 Macro Functions 14.1 Subprogram Control; M98, M99, M198 14.1.2 Subprogram Call; M198 Function and purpose Programs registered in a device set with the parameter can be called as subprograms. To call a program in the de- vice as a subprogram, command the following with the main program.
  • Page 560 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 14 Macro Functions 14.1 Subprogram Control; M98, M99, M198 Detailed description The registration destination (device and directory) of the program to be called with the M198 command can be switched with the parameter setting. Name Details Setting range (unit)
  • Page 561 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 14 Macro Functions 14.2 Variable Commands 14.2 Variable Commands Function and purpose Programming can be endowed with flexibility and general-purpose capabilities by designating variables instead of giving direct numerical values to particular addresses in a program, and by assigning the variable values depending on the conditions that exist when executing the program.
  • Page 562 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 14 Macro Functions 14.2 Variable Commands Kind of variables The following table gives the kinds of variables. The common variables are divided into the following two kinds. Common variable 1: Variables that can be used commonly throughout the part systems. Common variable 2: Variables that can be used commonly within the part system's program.
  • Page 563 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 14 Macro Functions 14.2 Variable Commands (*4) When the parameter "#1316 CrossCom" is set to "1", the common variables #100100 to #800199 can be shared between the part systems. (This depends on the MTB specifications.) The part system common variable which can be used is shown in the table below.
  • Page 564 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 14 Macro Functions 14.2 Variable Commands (Example) If variables of # numbers undefined in the specifications exist in the input file when there are 700 sets of common variables (#100 to #199, #400 to #999, and #100100 to #800199), they are ignored, and only the variables de- fined in the specifications are input.
  • Page 565 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 14 Macro Functions 14.2 Variable Commands Protection of common variable (1) If the common variable protection function is valid, the common variables in the range specified in the parameters (#12111 to #12114) cannot be changed from machining program or screen operation, or user operation such as file input.
  • Page 566 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 14 Macro Functions 14.2 Variable Commands (*1) The number of variables for extended common variables I/II/III is determined by the parameter (depending on the MTB specifications). [Extended common variable I] Variables of the type of which the parameter setting value is not "0" are available. Number of real type variables #11823 ComVar1DecN Number of integer type variables #11824 ComVar1IntN...
  • Page 567 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 14 Macro Functions 14.3 User Macro 14.3 User Macro Function and purpose A group of control and arithmetic instructions can be registered and used as a macro program to make it one inte- grated function.
  • Page 568 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 14 Macro Functions 14.4 Macro Call Instructions 14.4 Macro Call Instructions Function and purpose Macro call commands include the simple calls which call only the instructed block and the modal calls (types A and B) which call a block in the call modal.
  • Page 569 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 14 Macro Functions 14.4 Macro Call Instructions 14.4.1 Simple Macro Calls; G65 Function and purpose Main program Subprogram(O__) to Subprogram G65 P__ L__ ; M99 ; to Main program M99 is used to terminate the user macro subprogram. Command format Simple macro calls G65 P__ L__ argument ;...
  • Page 570 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 14 Macro Functions 14.4 Macro Call Instructions Detailed description (1) When the argument must be transferred as a local variable to a user macro subprogram, the actual value should be designated after the address. In this case, regardless of the address, a sign and decimal point can be used in the argument.
  • Page 571 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 14 Macro Functions 14.4 Macro Call Instructions Argument designation II Format: A__B__C__I__J__K__I__J__K__... (a) In addition to address A, B and C, up to 10 groups of arguments with I, J, K serving as 1 group can be designated. (b) When the same address is duplicated, designate the addresses in the specified order.
  • Page 572 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 14 Macro Functions 14.4 Macro Call Instructions Using arguments designations I and II together (1) If addresses corresponding to the same variable are commanded when both types I and II are used to designate arguments, the latter address will become valid.
  • Page 573 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 14 Macro Functions 14.4 Macro Call Instructions 14.4.2 Modal Call A (Movement Command Call) ; G66 Function and purpose Main program Subprogram to Subprogram G66 P__ L__ ; M99 ; to Main program G67 ;...
  • Page 574 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 14 Macro Functions 14.4 Macro Call Instructions Detailed description (1) When the G66 command is entered, the specified user macro program will be called after the movement com- mand in a block with the movement commands has been executed, until the G67 (cancel) command is entered. (2) The G66 and G67 commands must be paired in a same program.
  • Page 575 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 14 Macro Functions 14.4 Macro Call Instructions 14.4.3 Modal Call B (for Each Block); G66.1 Function and purpose The specified user macro subprogram is called unconditionally for each command block that is assigned between G66.1 and G67 and the subprogram will be repeated for the number of times specified in .
  • Page 576 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 14 Macro Functions 14.4 Macro Call Instructions Detailed description (1) In the G66.1 mode, everything except the O, N and G codes in the various command blocks which are read are handled as the argument without being executed. Any G code designated last or any N code commanded after anything except O and N will function as the argument.
  • Page 577 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 14 Macro Functions 14.4 Macro Call Instructions 14.4.4 G Code Macro Call Function and purpose User macro subprogram with prescribed program numbers can be called merely by issuing the G code command. Command format Macro call via G code G** P__ L__ argument ;...
  • Page 578 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 14 Macro Functions 14.4 Macro Call Instructions (7) The macro program to be called by the G code macro call needs to be registered in the NC memory or hard disk according to the parameter "#11053 UserProgramStorage". (This depends on the MTB specifications.) When it is registered in a device other than the storage locations below, the program error (P232) occurs.
  • Page 579 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 14 Macro Functions 14.4 Macro Call Instructions 14.4.5 Miscellaneous Command Macro Call (for M, S, T, B Code Macro Call) Function and purpose The user macro subprogram of the specified program number can be called merely by issuing an M (or S, T, B) code.
  • Page 580 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 14 Macro Functions 14.4 Macro Call Instructions (7) The macro program to be called by the miscellaneous command macro call needs to be registered in the NC memory or hard disk according to the parameter "#11053 UserProgramStorage". (This depends on the MTB specifications.) When it is registered in a device other than the storage locations below, the program error (P232) occurs.
  • Page 581 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 14 Macro Functions 14.4 Macro Call Instructions 14.4.6 Detailed Description for Macro Call Instruction Detailed description Differences between M98 and G65 commands (1) The argument can be designated for G65 but not for M98. (2) The sequence number can be designated for M98, but not for G65, G66 and G66.1.
  • Page 582 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 14 Macro Functions 14.4 Macro Call Instructions (3) When M98 command is executed in G66 (G66.1) modal, the program designated by G66 (G66.1) will be exe- cuted after completing the movement command in the subprogram called by M98 (in case of G66.1, after com- pleting each block).
  • Page 583 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 14 Macro Functions 14.4 Macro Call Instructions 14.4.7 Handling the Macro Call Command Function and purpose Macro call commands (including the subprogram call command M98 and M198) are usually treated as executable statements; however, they can be treated in the same manner as macro statements by setting the parameter. A batch processing with commands at the call destination can be performed by treating as macro statements.
  • Page 584 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 14 Macro Functions 14.4 Macro Call Instructions (2) Details of operation when "#1296 ext32/bit5" is set to "1" Call the subprogram and execute the head block of the subprogram in the macro call command block. Main program Subprogram Operation...
  • Page 585 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 14 Macro Functions 14.4 Macro Call Instructions (6) This function is valid regardless of the nesting depth. When the macro call commands are successively issued (when the head block of the subprogram is the macro call command), the commands are treated as successive macro statements.
  • Page 586 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 14 Macro Functions 14.4 Macro Call Instructions Precautions (1) When successive macro statements are commanded immediately before the macro call command is issued, a batch processing for the macro call command and the head block of the subprogram may not be performed de- pending on the number of macro statement blocks.
  • Page 587 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 14 Macro Functions 14.4 Macro Call Instructions 14.4.8 ASCII Code Macro Function and purpose A macro program can be called out by setting the correspondence of a subprogram (macro program) preregistered with the parameters to codes, and then commanding the ASCII code in the machining program. This function can be used in addition to the G, M, S, T and B miscellaneous command macro call function.
  • Page 588 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 14 Macro Functions 14.4 Macro Call Instructions Command format □**** P__ L__ ; ... Designates the address and code □ ASCII code for calling out a macro (one character) **** Value or expression output to variable (Setting range: ±999999.9999) (*1) (*1)
  • Page 589 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 14 Macro Functions 14.4 Macro Call Instructions (4) When ",D" or "<(Character string)>"is commanded in a block that is calling a G code macro, a miscellaneous command macro, or an ASCII macro while the macro argument L/P valid function is enabled, a program error (P33) will occur.
  • Page 590 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 14 Macro Functions 14.4 Macro Call Instructions Precautions Calling a macro with an ASCII code from a macro-called program A macro cannot be called with an ASCII code from a macro-called program with an ASCII code. The other patterns are shown below.
  • Page 591 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 14 Macro Functions 14.4 Macro Call Instructions Order of command priority If "M" is designated for the ASCII code address, it may overlap with the codes basically necessary for that machine. In this case, commands will be identified with the following priority using code values. (1) M98, M99, M198 (subprogram call command) M00 (program stop command) M01 (optional stop command)
  • Page 592 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 14 Macro Functions 14.5 Variables Used in User Macros 14.5 Variables Used in User Macros Function and purpose Both the variable specifications and user macro specifications are required for the variables that are used with the user macros.
  • Page 593 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 14 Macro Functions 14.5 Variables Used in User Macros Undefined variables When applying the user macro specifications, variables which have not been used even once after the power was switched on or local variables which were not specified by the G65, G66 or G66.1 commands, can be used as <Blank>.
  • Page 594 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 14 Macro Functions 14.5 Variables Used in User Macros 14.5.1 Common Variables Detailed description Common variables can be used commonly from any position. Number of the common variables sets depends on the specifications. Refer to the explanation about Variable Commands for details.
  • Page 595 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 14 Macro Functions 14.5 Variables Used in User Macros 14.5.2 Extended Common Variable 14.5.2.1 Extended Common Variable I/II Function and purpose Extended common variables I/II (#10000 to #89999) are available in addition to common variables. Before using extended common variable I/II, it is necessary to set the system variable #9001 to "1"...
  • Page 596 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 14 Macro Functions 14.5 Variables Used in User Macros (4) The variable numbers of the extended common variables are assigned in the order of extended common variable I real number data, extended common variable II real number data, and extended common variable I integer da- ta, starting from #10000.
  • Page 597 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 14 Macro Functions 14.5 Variables Used in User Macros 14.5.2.2 Extended Common Variable III Function and purpose In addition to common variables, 8000 sets (#90000 to #97999) of extended common variable III can be used. The extended common variable III is stored as the extended common variable data files on a dedicated SD card.
  • Page 598 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 14 Macro Functions 14.5 Variables Used in User Macros Details of extended common variable III (1) The variable numbers of the extended common variable III are assigned in the order of the extended common variable III real number data, and the extended common variable III integer data, starting from #90000.
  • Page 599 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 14 Macro Functions 14.5 Variables Used in User Macros 14.5.2.3 Precautions for Extended Common Variable Relationship with other functions (1) Manual arbitrary reverse run The manual arbitrary reverse run is prohibited for any of the following variables. Extended common variable III load file No.(#9000) Extended common variable III (#90000 to #97999) Extended common variable/system variable switching (#9001)
  • Page 600 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 14 Macro Functions 14.5 Variables Used in User Macros 14.5.3 Local Variables (#1 to #33) Detailed description Local variables can be defined as an <argument> when a macro subprogram is called, and also used locally within main programs and subprograms.
  • Page 601 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 14 Macro Functions 14.5 Variables Used in User Macros [Argument designation II] Argument designa- Variable in macro Argument designa- Variable in macro tion II address tion II address <Note> The numbers 1 to 10 accompanying I, J and K indicate the sequence of the commanded sets, and are not required in the actual command.
  • Page 602 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 14 Macro Functions 14.5 Variables Used in User Macros (2) Local variables can be used independently on each of the macro call levels (4 levels). Local variables are also provided independently for the main program (macro level 0). Arguments cannot be used for the level 0 local variables.
  • Page 603 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 14 Macro Functions 14.6 User Macro Commands 14.6 User Macro Commands 14.6.1 Operation Commands Function and purpose A variety of operations can be performed between variables. Command format #i = <formula> ; <Formula> is a combination of constants, variables, functions and operators. Constants can be used instead of #j and #k below.
  • Page 604 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 14 Macro Functions 14.6 User Macro Commands Note (1) A value without a decimal point is basically treated as a value with a decimal point at the end (1 = 1.000). (2) Compensation amounts from #10001 and workpiece coordinate system compensation values from #5201 are handled as data with a decimal point.
  • Page 605 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 14 Macro Functions 14.6 User Macro Commands Examples of operation commands Main program G65 P100 A10 B20.; #1 10.000 and argument #2 20.000 #101 = 100.000 #102 = 200.000; designation #101 100.000 #102 200.000 Definition and #1 = 1000 1000.000...
  • Page 606 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 14 Macro Functions 14.6 User Macro Commands (11) Tangent #551 = TAN [60] #551 1.732 #552 = TAN [60.] #552 1.732 #553 = 1000 * TAN [60] #553 1732.051 #554 = 1000 * TAN [60.] #554 1732.051 #555 = 1000.
  • Page 607 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 14 Macro Functions 14.6 User Macro Commands (21) Natural loga- #10 = LN [5] #101 1.609 rithms #102 = LN [0.5] #102 -0.693 #103 = LN [-5] Error "P282" (22) Exponents #104 = EXP [2] #104 7.389 #105 = EXP [1]...
  • Page 608 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 14 Macro Functions 14.6 User Macro Commands 14.6.2 Control Commands Function and purpose The flow of programs can be controlled by "IF-GOTO-", "IF-THEN-ELSE-ENDIF", and "WHILE-DO-". When a program in an external device such as a USB memory device is executed, a period of processing time is required in the subprogram call or in the instruction to change the flow of the program such as GOTO or DO-END;...
  • Page 609 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 14 Macro Functions 14.6 User Macro Commands Branch (IF-THEN-ELSE-ENDIF) IF [conditional expression] THEN ; Macro statement or executable statement ELSE ; Macro statement or executable statement ENDIF ; IF [conditional expression] THEN operation command ; ELSE operation command ;...
  • Page 610 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 14 Macro Functions 14.6 User Macro Commands (10) The IF statement can be commanded up to 10 nesting levels. When the nesting level exceeds 10, a program error (P288) will occur. The following shows an example in which the nesting level is set to 3. IF[ #100 EQ 0 ] THEN ;...
  • Page 611 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 14 Macro Functions 14.6 User Macro Commands (14) You can call a subprogram (M98, G65, G66, etc.) from the inside of the IF to ENDIF range. Also, you can execute the IF, THEN, ELSE, and ENDIF commands in a subprogram. The IF statement can be commanded up to 10 nesting levels even in a subprogram.
  • Page 612 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 14 Macro Functions 14.6 User Macro Commands (3) Up to 27 nesting levels can be used for WHILE-DOm. (4) The number of WHILE-DOm nesting levels can- Any number from 1 to 127 can be used for "m" as a not exceed 27.
  • Page 613 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 14 Macro Functions 14.6 User Macro Commands (11) Calls can be initiated by G65 or G66 between (12) A program error will occur in M99 if WHILE and WHILE - DOm's and commands can be issued again END are not paired in the subprogram (including from 1.
  • Page 614 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 14 Macro Functions 14.6 User Macro Commands 14.6.3 External Output Commands; POPEN, PCLOS, DPRNT Function and purpose Besides the standard user macro commands, the following macro instructions are also available as external output commands.
  • Page 615 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 14 Macro Functions 14.6 User Macro Commands Detailed description Open command : POPEN (1) The command is issued before the series of data output commands. (2) The DC2 control code and % code are output from the NC system to the external output device. (3) Once POPEN;...
  • Page 616 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 14 Macro Functions 14.6 User Macro Commands Use example: <Parameter setting> #1127 DPRINT (DPRINT alignment) = 1 (Align the minimum digit and output) #9007 MACRO PRINT PORT = 9 (Output to a memory card by an external output command) #9008 MACRO PRINT DEV.
  • Page 617 PCLOS command or NC reset after a POPEN command is issued. (8) As for M800V series, output data of an external output command can be output to a memory card only when the drive name of the card is "E:" or "F:". Drive name "E" is given the priority. A program error (P460) will occur if the output port executes the external output command of the memory card when the drive name is neither "E:"...
  • Page 618 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 14 Macro Functions 14.6 User Macro Commands 14.6.4 Precautions Precautions When the user macro commands are employed, it is possible to combine conventional control commands such as movement commands and the M, S, T commands with macro commands such as the arithmetic, decision, branching for creating the machining programs.
  • Page 619 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 14 Macro Functions 14.6 User Macro Commands Flow of processing by the program example in the previous page <Macro single OFF> N4, N5 and N6 are processed in parallel with the control of the executable statement of N3. If the analysis of N4, N5, and N6 is in time during N3 control, the machine movement is continuously controlled.
  • Page 620 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 14 Macro Functions 14.7 Macro Interruption; M96, M97 14.7 Macro Interruption; M96, M97 Function and purpose A user macro interrupt signal (UIT) is input from the machine to interrupt the program currently being executed, and instead calls and executes another program.
  • Page 621 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 14 Macro Functions 14.7 Macro Interruption; M96, M97 Detailed description (1) The user macro interrupt function is enabled and disabled by the M96 and M97 commands programmed to make the user macro interrupt signal (UIT) valid or invalid. That is, if an interrupt signal (UIT) is input from the machine side in a user macro interruption enable period from when M96 is issued to when M97 is issued or the NC is reset, a user macro interruption is caused to execute the program specified by P__ instead of the one being ex- ecuted currently.
  • Page 622 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 14 Macro Functions 14.7 Macro Interruption; M96, M97 Outline of operation (1) When a user macro interrupt signal (UIT) is input after an "M96 Pp1;" command is issued by the current program, interrupt program "Op1" is executed. When an "M99"; command is issued by the interrupt program, control re- turns to the main program.
  • Page 623 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 14 Macro Functions 14.7 Macro Interruption; M96, M97 Interrupt type Interrupt types 1 and 2 can be selected by the parameter "#1113 INT_2". [Type 1] (1) When an interrupt signal (UIT) is input, the system immediately stops moving the tool and interrupts dwell, then permits the interrupt program to run.
  • Page 624 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 14 Macro Functions 14.7 Macro Interruption; M96, M97 [Type 1] Main program block 1 block 2 block 3 If the interrupt program contains a move or miscellaneous function command, the reset of block (2) is lost. block 1 block 2 block 3...
  • Page 625 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 14 Macro Functions 14.7 Macro Interruption; M96, M97 Calling method User macro interruption is classified into the following two types depending on the way an interrupt program is called. These two types of interrupt are selected by parameter "#8155 Sub-pro interrupt". This setting also involves the MTB settings (parameter "#1229 set01/bit0").
  • Page 626 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 14 Macro Functions 14.7 Macro Interruption; M96, M97 Modal information affected by user macro interruption If modal information is changed by the interrupt program, it is handled as follows after control returns from the inter- rupt program to the main program.
  • Page 627 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 14 Macro Functions 14.7 Macro Interruption; M96, M97 (*1) For the commands shown below, modal information is not restored after control has been returned from the interrupt program. Command Function Machining center Lathe system system Dwell Data input by program cancel...
  • Page 628 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 14 Macro Functions 14.7 Macro Interruption; M96, M97 Modal information variables (#4401 to #4520) Modal information when control passes to the user macro interruption program can be known by reading system variables #4401 to #4520. The unit specified with a command applies.
  • Page 629 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 14 Macro Functions 14.7 Macro Interruption; M96, M97 Parameters (1) Subprogram call validity "#8155 Sub-pro interrupt" ("#1229 set01/bit0") 1: Subprogram type user macro interruption 0: Macro type user macro interruption (2) Status trigger method validity "#1112 S_TRG" (*1) 1: Status trigger method 0: Edge trigger method (3) Interrupt type 2 validity "#1113 INT_2"...
  • Page 630 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 14 Macro Functions 14.7 Macro Interruption; M96, M97 Precautions (1) If the user macro interruption program uses system variables #5001 and after (position information) to read co- ordinates, the coordinates pre-read in the buffer are used. (2) If an interruption is performed during execution of the following functions, a sequence No.
  • Page 631 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 14 Macro Functions 14.8 Variable Value Display in Program Being Executed 14.8 Variable Value Display in Program Being Executed Function and purpose If a variable, arithmetic operation, or function is specified in the numerical part following the address in the display of the running machining program, it is replaced with the calculated numerical value to be displayed.
  • Page 632 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 14 Macro Functions 14.8 Variable Value Display in Program Being Executed (7) In the operation up to the intermediate point of the reference position return command (G28, G29, G30), the re- placement display is performed for the currently executed block. When the operation starts after the intermediate point, the replacement display returns to the original display of variables, arithmetic operation, and functions.
  • Page 633 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (1/2) 14 Macro Functions 14.8 Variable Value Display in Program Being Executed (Example 1) Display of G code, axis address, and M code [N01 block running] Machining program Display after replacement N01 G#100 X[#101 + 3.] N01 G4 X8.
  • Page 634 Program Support Functions IB-1501620-H...
  • Page 635 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 15 Program Support Functions 15.1 Corner Chamfering I/Corner Rounding I 15Program Support Functions 15.1 Corner Chamfering I/Corner Rounding I Function and purpose Chamfering at any angle or corner rounding is performed automatically by adding ",C_" or ",R_" to the end of the block to be commanded first among those command blocks which shape the corner with lines only.
  • Page 636 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 15 Program Support Functions 15.1 Corner Chamfering I/Corner Rounding I (11) Corner chamfering cannot be commanded with "I" or "K" in a circular command block. "I" and "K" are the circular center commands. Program example G01 W100.
  • Page 637 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 15 Program Support Functions 15.1 Corner Chamfering I/Corner Rounding I 15.1.2 Corner Rounding I ; G01 X_ Z_ ,R_/R_ Function and purpose This performs a corner rounding to both sides of the hypothetical corner which would appear as if chamfering is not performed, at the radius of the circular commanded with ",R_"...
  • Page 638 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 15 Program Support Functions 15.1 Corner Chamfering I/Corner Rounding I Program example G01 W100. ,R10. F100 ; U280 W100. ; R10.0 100.0 100.0 (a) Corner rounding start point (b) Corner rounding end point (c) Hypothetical corner intersection point Precautions (1) Corner chamfering and corner rounding can be commanded with "I", "K", "R"...
  • Page 639 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 15 Program Support Functions 15.1 Corner Chamfering I/Corner Rounding I 15.1.3 Corner Chamfering Expansion/Corner Rounding Expansion Function and purpose Using an E command, the feedrate can be designated for the corner chamfering and corner rounding section. In this way, the corner section can be cut into a correct shape.
  • Page 640 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 15 Program Support Functions 15.1 Corner Chamfering I/Corner Rounding I Detailed description (1) The E command is modal. It is also valid for the feed in the next corner chamfering/corner rounding section. Example (G94) F100.
  • Page 641 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 15 Program Support Functions 15.1 Corner Chamfering I/Corner Rounding I 15.1.4 Interrupt during Corner Chamfering/Interrupt during Corner Rounding Detailed description (1) Shown below are the operations of manual interruption during corner chamfering or corner rounding. With an absolute command and manual absolute switch ON.
  • Page 642 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 15 Program Support Functions 15.2 Corner Chamfering II/Corner Rounding II 15.2 Corner Chamfering II/Corner Rounding II Function and purpose Corner chamfering and corner rounding can be performed by adding ",C" or ",R" to the end of the block which is commanded first among the block that forms a corner with continuous arbitrary angle lines or arcs.
  • Page 643 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 15 Program Support Functions 15.2 Corner Chamfering II/Corner Rounding II (13) If "C" is used as the axis name or the 2nd miscellaneous function, corner chamfering cannot be commanded with "C". (14) Corner chamfering cannot be commanded with "I" or "K" in a circular command block. "I" and "K" are the circular center commands.
  • Page 644 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 15 Program Support Functions 15.2 Corner Chamfering II/Corner Rounding II Precautions (1) Corner chamfering and corner rounding can be commanded with "I", "K", "R" only when the 1st block of the cor- ner chamfering/corner rounding command is linear. (2) Corner chamfering with "I", "K", and corner rounding with "R"...
  • Page 645 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 15 Program Support Functions 15.2 Corner Chamfering II/Corner Rounding II 15.2.2 Corner Rounding II ; G01/G02/G03 X_ Z_ ,R_/R_ Function and purpose The corner is rounded by commanding ",R_" (or "R_") in the 1st block of the two continuous blocks containing an arc. Command format N100 G03 X__ Z__ I__ K__ ,R__ (or R__) ;...
  • Page 646 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 15 Program Support Functions 15.2 Corner Chamfering II/Corner Rounding II Program example (1) Linear - arc Absolute command N1 G28 X Z ; N2 G00 X60. Z100. ; N3 G01 X160. Z50. ,R10. F100 ; 160.
  • Page 647 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 15 Program Support Functions 15.2 Corner Chamfering II/Corner Rounding II 15.2.3 Corner Chamfering Expansion/Corner Rounding Expansion For details, refer to "Corner Chamfering I / Corner Rounding" and "Corner Chamfering Expansion / Corner Rounding Expansion".
  • Page 648 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 15 Program Support Functions 15.3 Linear Angle Command ; G01 X_/Z_ A_/,A_ 15.3 Linear Angle Command ; G01 X_/Z_ A_/,A_ Function and purpose The end point coordinates are automatically calculated by commanding the linear angle and one of the end point coordinate axes.
  • Page 649 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 15 Program Support Functions 15.4 Geometric I; G01 A_ 15.4 Geometric I; G01 A_ Function and purpose When it is difficult to calculate the intersection point of two straight lines of consecutive linear interpolation com- mands, the end point of the first straight line will be automatically calculated inside the NC and the movement com- mand will be controlled, provided that the gradient of the first straight line as well as the end point coordinates and gradient of the second straight line are commanded.
  • Page 650 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 15 Program Support Functions 15.4 Geometric I; G01 A_ Relationship with other functions A description is provided using the following examples. (C) Current position (E) End point coordinates (I) Intersection point (calculated automatically) (1) Corner chamfering and corner rounding can be commanded after the angle command in the 1st block.
  • Page 651 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 15 Program Support Functions 15.5 Geometric IB 15.5 Geometric IB Function and purpose Geometric IB is used to obtain the contact point or the intersection point for two travel commands in consecutive blocks when at least one of the commands is a circular path command. The center point of the circular arc or the slope angle of the straight line is required instead of the end point of the first block.
  • Page 652 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 15 Program Support Functions 15.5 Geometric IB 15.5.1 Geometric IB (Automatic Calculation of Contact Point of Two Circular Arcs); G02/G03 P_Q_ /R_ Function and purpose When the contact point of two consecutive contacting circular arcs is not indicated in the drawing, it can be automat- ically calculated using any one of the following commands.
  • Page 653 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 15 Program Support Functions 15.5 Geometric IB Detailed description (1) The end point coordinates of the 2nd block should be commanded with the absolute position. A program error (P393) occurs before the 1st block if commanded with the incremental position. (2) A program error (P390) occurs before the 1st block if there is no geometric IB specification.
  • Page 654 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 15 Program Support Functions 15.5 Geometric IB Program example (1) IK and IK commands (T) Contact point (calculated automatical- 30.0 80.0 50.0 50.0 20.0 60.0 G01 X20.0 Z60.0; N1 G02 I15.0 K0.0 F100; N2 G03 X80.0 Z30.0 I-15.0 K0.0;...
  • Page 655 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 15 Program Support Functions 15.5 Geometric IB Relationship with other functions Command Tool path Geometric IB + corner chamfering II N1 G09 I_ K_ ; N2 G02 X_ Z_ R_ ,C_ ; G02 X_ Z_ R_ ; Geometric IB + corner rounding II N1 G03 I_ K_ ;...
  • Page 656 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 15 Program Support Functions 15.5 Geometric IB 15.5.2 Geometric IB (Automatic Calculation of Intersection Point between Line And Circular Arc) ; G01 A_ , G02/G03 P_Q_H_ Function and purpose When the intersection point between a line and a circular arc is not indicated in the drawing though they intersect, it can be automatically calculated by commanding the following program.
  • Page 657 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 15 Program Support Functions 15.5 Geometric IB Detailed description (1) A program error (P390) occurs before the 1st block if there is no geometric IB specification. (2) The gradient of the line is the angle to the positive (+) direction of its horizontal axis of the selected plane. The counterclockwise (CCW) direction is considered as positive (+) and the clockwise direction (CW) as negative (-).
  • Page 658 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 15 Program Support Functions 15.5 Geometric IB Program example 100.0 80.0 50.0 G01 X80.0 Z50.0 F100; N1 G01 A180.0; N2 G03 X100.0 Z0 I-50. K0; (mm) IB-1501620-H...
  • Page 659 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 15 Program Support Functions 15.5 Geometric IB Relationship with other functions Command Tool path Geometric IB + corner chamfering II N1 G01 A_ ,C_ ; N2 G03 X_ Z_ I_ K_ H_ ; Geometric IB + corner rounding II N1 G01 A_ ,R_ ;...
  • Page 660 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 15 Program Support Functions 15.5 Geometric IB 15.5.3 Geometric IB (Automatic Calculation of Contact Point between Line And Circular Arc) ; G01 A_ , G02/G03 R_H_ Function and purpose When the contact point between a line and a circular arc is not indicated in the drawing though they are in contact, it can be automatically calculated by commanding the following program.
  • Page 661 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 15 Program Support Functions 15.5 Geometric IB Detailed description (1) A program error (P390) occurs before the 1st block if there is no geometric IB specification. (2) The gradient of the line is the angle to the positive (+) direction of its horizontal axis of the selected plane. The counterclockwise (CCW) direction is considered as positive (+) and the clockwise direction (CW) as negative (-).
  • Page 662 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 15 Program Support Functions 15.5 Geometric IB Program example 50.0 100.0 50.0 40.0 G01 X40.0 Z50.0 F100; N1 G01 A135.0; N2 G03 X100.0 Z0.0 R50.0; (mm) IB-1501620-H...
  • Page 663 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 15 Program Support Functions 15.5 Geometric IB Relationship with other functions Command Tool path Geometric IB + corner chamfering N1 G03 R_ ; N2 G01 X_ Z_ A_ ,C_ ; G01 X_ Z_ ; Geometric IB + corner rounding N1 G03 R_ ;...
  • Page 664 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 15 Program Support Functions 15.6 Manual Arbitrary Reverse Run Prohibition ; G127 15.6 Manual Arbitrary Reverse Run Prohibition ; G127 Function and purpose The manual arbitrary reverse run function controls the feedrate, which is under automatic operation in memory or MDI mode, in proportion to the manual feedrate by the jog or the rotation speed by the manual handle, and manually carries out the reverse run.
  • Page 665 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 15 Program Support Functions 15.6 Manual Arbitrary Reverse Run Prohibition ; G127 Relationship with other functions The following shows the relationship between the manual arbitrary reverse run command and G code. Note Fixed cycles or MSTB commands may be prohibited to reverse run or the reverse run operation on tapping cycle may differ depending on the MTB specifications (parameter "#1260 set32"...
  • Page 666 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 15 Program Support Functions 15.6 Manual Arbitrary Reverse Run Prohibition ; G127 G code Function name Reverse Remarks (Lathe sys- tem) X-Y plane selection ○ *2 Data is recovered using the modal informa- tion storage block.
  • Page 667 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 15 Program Support Functions 15.6 Manual Arbitrary Reverse Run Prohibition ; G127 G code Function name Reverse Remarks (Lathe sys- tem) G50.2 Tool spindle synchronization IB mode can- × *3 G250 (Spindle - tool axis synchronization) G51.2 Tool spindle synchronization IB mode ON ×...
  • Page 668 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 15 Program Support Functions 15.6 Manual Arbitrary Reverse Run Prohibition ; G127 G code Function name Reverse Remarks (Lathe sys- tem) Longitudinal cut-off cycle ○ *1 Data is created for each movement block in the fixed cycle.
  • Page 669 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 15 Program Support Functions 15.6 Manual Arbitrary Reverse Run Prohibition ; G127 G code Function name Reverse Remarks (Lathe sys- tem) Coordinate system setting / Spindle clamp ○ *1 speed setting G92.1 Workpiece coordinate preset ○...
  • Page 670 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 15 Program Support Functions 15.7 Data Input by Program 15.7 Data Input by Program 15.7.1 Parameter Input by Program; G10 L70, G11 Function and purpose The parameters set from the setting and display unit can be changed in the machining programs. For commanding data with decimal point, and character string data.
  • Page 671 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 15 Program Support Functions 15.7 Data Input by Program (9) The following data cannot be changed with the G10 L70 command: Tool compensation data Workpiece coordinate data PLC switch PLC axis parameter Device open parameters SRAM open parameters DeviceNet parameters (10) The settings of the parameters with (PR) in the parameter list will be enabled after the power is turned OFF and...
  • Page 672 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 15 Program Support Functions 15.7 Data Input by Program 15.7.2 Compensation Data Input by Program (Tool Compensation Amount) ; G10 L10/L11, G11 Function and purpose The tool offset can be set or changed using the G10 command. When the command is given with absolute positions (X, Z and R), the commanded offset amount serves as the new offset amount, whereas when the command is given with incremental positions (U, W and C), the sum of present offset and the commanded offset serves as the new offset amount.
  • Page 673 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 15 Program Support Functions 15.7 Data Input by Program Detailed description (1) The following table shows the compensation Nos. and the setting ranges of the hypothetical tool nose points. Address Meaning Setting range Compensation No.
  • Page 674 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 15 Program Support Functions 15.7 Data Input by Program 15.7.3 Compensation Data Input by Program (Workpiece Offset Amount) ; G10 L2/L20, G11 Function and purpose The workpiece offset amount can be set or changed using the G10 command. When the command is given with absolute positions (X, Z and R), the commanded offset amount serves as the new offset amount, whereas when the command is given with incremental positions (U, W and C), the sum of present offset and the commanded offset serves as the new offset amount.
  • Page 675 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 15 Program Support Functions 15.7 Data Input by Program Precautions (1) G10 is non-modal command and is valid only in the commanded block. (2) A program error (P172) occurs if an illegal L No. is commanded. (3) When the P command is omitted during workpiece coordinate system offset input (L2 or L20), it will be handled as the data input of currently selected workpiece offset.
  • Page 676 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 15 Program Support Functions 15.7 Data Input by Program 15.7.4 Material Shape Input by Program; G10 L101, G11 Function and purpose This function sets the material shape data of the 3D solid program check (hereinafter referred to as "3D check") us- ing the machining program.
  • Page 677 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 15 Program Support Functions 15.7 Data Input by Program Mounting angle Specify the mounting angle of a prism. For the mounting angle, set the angle that is formed by the X axis and one angle in the material. Set CCW to the positive direction for the mounting angle.
  • Page 678 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 15 Program Support Functions 15.7 Data Input by Program Detailed description Material shape settings from the program This function sets a material shape on the 3D check screen from the machining program. The 3D check sets the material shape using the data setting command of this function, and switches the drawing of materials at the timing of the subsequent data end command (G11).
  • Page 679 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 15 Program Support Functions 15.8 Tool Life Management 15.8 Tool Life Management 15.8.1 Tool Life Management II; T****99, T****88 Function and purpose Tool life management divides the tools being used into several groups, and manages the tool life (with cutting hours or number of cuttings in each group.
  • Page 680 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 15 Program Support Functions 15.8 Tool Life Management Program example Starts use of group 01 tool. T0199 ; T0188 ; Cancels group 01 tool compensation. For example, when the tool number of the tool in use is "17", this is equivalent to "T1700".
  • Page 681 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 15 Program Support Functions 15.8 Tool Life Management 15.8.2 Tool Life Management Data Input; G10 L3, G11 Function and purpose In tool life management II, it is possible to register, change, or add the tool life management data and delete a reg- istered group using the G10 command (non-modal command).
  • Page 682 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 15 Program Support Functions 15.8 Tool Life Management Operation example Program example Operation G10 L3 ; After deleting all group data, registration starts. P10 L10 N0 ; Group No. "10" is registered. T1010 ; Tool No.
  • Page 683 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 15 Program Support Functions 15.8 Tool Life Management 15.8.3 Allocation of the Number of Tool Life Management Sets to Part Systems Function and purpose The number of tool life management sets can be set per part system. This function is divided into following methods and which one is used depends on the MTB specifications (parame- ters "#1439 Tlife-SysAssign", "#12055 Tol-lifenum").
  • Page 684 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 15 Program Support Functions 15.8 Tool Life Management (2) Automatic and even allocation (with #1439=0) 1-part system 2-part system 3-part system 4-part system (Lathe system only) (Lathe system only) (*2) (*1) (*1) The maximum number of tool life management sets per part system is 999. (*2) If there is any remainder, the remainder is allocated to the 1st part system.
  • Page 685 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 15 Program Support Functions 15.9 Axis Name Switch ; G111 15.9 Axis Name Switch ; G111 Function and purpose This function switches the commanded axis and the control axis. When using a function, such as the hole drilling cycle (G88), that can be commanded to the limited axis this function can be used to give commands to axes that cannot be commanded with the normal command methods.
  • Page 686 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 15 Program Support Functions 15.9 Axis Name Switch ; G111 Detailed description (1) Axis name switch can be commanded simultaneously to several part systems. While changing the axis name, G111 cannot be re-commanded. If re-commanded, a program error (P411) will occur.
  • Page 687 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 15 Program Support Functions 15.9 Axis Name Switch ; G111 (4) Plane selection can be commanded during the axis name switching. (Ex.1) Plane where no axis switching is carried out G17 is commanded G18 is commanded G19 is commanded Y ( Y1 )
  • Page 688 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 15 Program Support Functions 15.9 Axis Name Switch ; G111 (8) For the machine specification whose absolute/incremental is switched by address, when the axis name switching is carried out, likewise the absolute address will be switched. (Example) Control X axis Control Y axis...
  • Page 689 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 15 Program Support Functions 15.9 Axis Name Switch ; G111 Program example (Example) G90 G00; G111 X Y ; G01 X100. ; → Y axis moves to 100. G01 Y100. ; → X axis moves to 100. G111 ;...
  • Page 690 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 15 Program Support Functions 15.9 Axis Name Switch ; G111 Relation with other functions (1) Milling interpolation (G12.1/G13.1) Do not command the axis name switching during the milling interpolation mode. If G111 is commanded during the milling mode, a program error (P411) will occur. (2) Constant surface speed control (G96, G97) (including clamp) Do not command the axis name switching during the constant surface speed control mode.
  • Page 691 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 15 Program Support Functions 15.9 Axis Name Switch ; G111 (14) Programmable current limitation (G10 L14) Do not command the programmable current limitation during G111 modal. If the programmable current limitation is commanded during G111 modal, a program error (P421) will occur. (15) Workpiece coordinate preset This function presets the workpiece coordinate system shifted with the program command or manual operation to the workpiece coordinate system which is offset by the workpiece coordinate offset amount from the machine...
  • Page 692 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 15 Program Support Functions 15.10 Mirror Image for Facing Tool Posts ; G68,G69 15.10 Mirror Image for Facing Tool Posts ; G68,G69 Function and purpose In a machine in which the base turret and facing turret are integrated, this function is used to cut with the facing turret cutter using a program created with the base turret side.
  • Page 693 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 15 Program Support Functions 15.10 Mirror Image for Facing Tool Posts ; G68,G69 Detailed description When G68 is commanded, the following program coordinate system is shifted to the facing turret side of the axis for which the mirror image for facing tool posts is valid (hereafter unless noted in particular, the X axis will be described as the axis for which mirror image for facing tool posts is valid).
  • Page 694 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 15 Program Support Functions 15.10 Mirror Image for Facing Tool Posts ; G68,G69 Absolute command/Incremental command (1) Absolute command The command position for the Z axis is reversed symmetrically, and the base turret moves to the position shifted by the distance between cutters.
  • Page 695 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 15 Program Support Functions 15.10 Mirror Image for Facing Tool Posts ; G68,G69 (3) Changing from an incremental command to an absolute command After changing to the absolute command, the same operation as “(1) Absolute command” takes place. T0101 ;...
  • Page 696 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 15 Program Support Functions 15.10 Mirror Image for Facing Tool Posts ; G68,G69 Tool compensation of facing turret Tool length (Z) Tool length basic point Tool length (X) Wear Workpiece offset amount Turret distance (parameter:radius value, X axis only) Tool length (Z) Wear...
  • Page 697 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 15 Program Support Functions 15.10 Mirror Image for Facing Tool Posts ; G68,G69 (1) Tool length offset The tool length offset amount is the length from the tool nose to the tool length basic point. This also applies for the facing turret.
  • Page 698 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 15 Program Support Functions 15.10 Mirror Image for Facing Tool Posts ; G68,G69 (3) Tool nose point with nose R compensation The tool nose point with nose R compensation is as follows. Note that if the selected plane differs from when the mirror image for facing tool posts was started, this will be handled as "#1118 mirr_A"...
  • Page 699 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 15 Program Support Functions 15.10 Mirror Image for Facing Tool Posts ; G68,G69 Program example T0101 ; Base turret selection Machining with base turret ("A" in the figure below) G00 X10. Z0. ; G01 Z-40.
  • Page 700 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 15 Program Support Functions 15.10 Mirror Image for Facing Tool Posts ; G68,G69 Relation with other functions Reference position return (G28, G30) Mirror image for facing tool posts will remain valid when moving to the intermediate point. Mirror image for facing tool posts will be invalidated when moving past the intermediate point and during movement that ignores the intermediate point.
  • Page 701 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 15 Program Support Functions 15.10 Mirror Image for Facing Tool Posts ; G68,G69 Manual interruption (1) When manual absolute is OFF If manual interruption is applied on an axis for which mirror image for facing tool posts is valid, the mirror image will not be applied on the interrupt amount.
  • Page 702 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 15 Program Support Functions 15.11 Interactive Cycle Insertion; G180 15.11 Interactive Cycle Insertion; G180 15.11.1 Interactive Cycle Insertion Function and purpose The machining and setup support cycles can be interactively inserted to a program which is opened on the edit screen.
  • Page 703 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 15 Program Support Functions 15.11 Interactive Cycle Insertion; G180 Detailed description Program format of cycle inserted with this function is indicated as follows: Program being edited on the edit screen G00 X_ Z_; (1) Cycle header G180 P1 A10201 (CONT-FACE);...
  • Page 704 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 15 Program Support Functions 15.11 Interactive Cycle Insertion; G180 Process part Description Program image (4) Cycle footer The footer that indicates the end of the cycle is output at the G180 P0; end of the cycle. Hole position head- The header that indicates the start of the hole position is G180 P31;...
  • Page 705 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 15 Program Support Functions 15.11 Interactive Cycle Insertion; G180 15.11.2 Interactive Macro Function and purpose Interactive macro means a macro program used for interactive cycle insertion. It is stored in the dedicated area. The command format is the same as when an interactive cycle is inserted.
  • Page 706 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 15 Program Support Functions 15.12 Axis Name Extension 15.12 Axis Name Extension Function and purpose The axis name (command axis name) used for giving the absolute/incremental command to NC control axis can be expanded to two characters.
  • Page 707 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 15 Program Support Functions 15.12 Axis Name Extension Enabling conditions In order to use this function, validate this function by the parameter and set the second character of the name-ex- tended axis. These parameters depend on the MTB specifications (parameters "#1266 ext02/bit0" and "#1601 axnameEx"). Detailed description Program commands for axis name extension (1) Relationship between parameter setting and command axis name...
  • Page 708 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 15 Program Support Functions 15.12 Axis Name Extension (a) When the setting value of the base axis I, J, or K corresponds to any name-unextended axis in the part sys- tem, the corresponded axis is identified as base axis I, J, or K. (b) When the NC is operated with the setting value of the base axis I, J, or K as follows, the program error (P11) occurs.
  • Page 709 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 15 Program Support Functions 15.12 Axis Name Extension G codes which can use name-extended axis The following list shows the G codes whose functions are available for the name-extended axis among the G codes using an axis name as argument.
  • Page 710 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 15 Program Support Functions 15.12 Axis Name Extension (2) G10 command in input/output file The input/output can be performed for the workpiece offset (G10 L2/L20) and L system tool offset (G10 L10/L11) by G10 command written in the file (WORK.OFS, TOOL.OFS), and the data input/output for the name-extended axis can be performed by G10 command in this case.
  • Page 711 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 15 Program Support Functions 15.12 Axis Name Extension [Case in which the following axis names exist] Axis names Run command Operation #100 = ABS[#101]; Set to the ABS command of a macro. (This is not regarded as "#100 = AB0 S[#101];".) AB, XA XA[ABS[#100]];...
  • Page 712 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 15 Program Support Functions 15.13 Program Format Switch; G188/G189 15.13 Program Format Switch; G188/G189 Function and purpose Program format switch is a function designed to switch the program format (G code system) using G codes or PLC signal.
  • Page 713 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 15 Program Support Functions 15.13 Program Format Switch; G188/G189 Command format The part system in which these G commands are to be executed depends on the MTB specifications (parameter "#1047 G_Chg_En_Sno"). Program format switch ON G188;...
  • Page 714 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 15 Program Support Functions 15.13 Program Format Switch; G188/G189 Tool compensation (1) Tool compensation command When a tool compensation command is given during the program format switch mode, the machining center sys- tem compatible operation is performed. [Machining center system compatible operation] G43 Zz Hh ;...
  • Page 715 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 15 Program Support Functions 15.13 Program Format Switch; G188/G189 Items in Tool offset screen Tool compensation operation during program format switch Tool length - 1st axis (X1) (Not used) Tool length - 2nd axis (Z1) Used as the length dimension.
  • Page 716 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 15 Program Support Functions 15.13 Program Format Switch; G188/G189 System variable After switching the program format, you can use the system variables of the switched G code system. If you use a system variable that can only be used in the previous G code system, the program error (P241) occurs. For details, refer to "23.1.1 System Variables for Program Format Switch".
  • Page 717 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 15 Program Support Functions 15.13 Program Format Switch; G188/G189 Other operation (1) Relation with a part system Program format is changed in a part system where you execute the program format switch operation. The part system that enables the program format switch mode depends on the MTB specifications (parameter "#1047 G_Chg_En_Sno").
  • Page 718 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 15 Program Support Functions 15.13 Program Format Switch; G188/G189 (2) Functions handled as "additional functions" during program format switch Whether the M system functions shown below are available during program format switch depends on the MTB specifications.
  • Page 719 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 15 Program Support Functions 15.13 Program Format Switch; G188/G189 Relationship with other functions Reset and emergency stop If you execute NC reset or cancel Emergency stop, the G group 24 modal status changes as follows. (The G group 24 modal state after the operation is stated in brackets ( ).) The status varies depending on a combination of the status of the program format switch request (PFCHR) signal and the parameter (#1151).
  • Page 720 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 15 Program Support Functions 15.13 Program Format Switch; G188/G189 Mixed control (Cross axis control) (1) If G188 is commanded in a part system during mixed control I/II, a program error (P29) will occur. (2) When the axis included in the G188 modal part system is designated as the mixed control target in mixed control II, an operation error (M01 1035) will occur.
  • Page 721 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 15 Program Support Functions 15.13 Program Format Switch; G188/G189 Precautions (1) The program format switch command (G188/G189) must be issued alone in a block. If another G code is com- manded in the same block, a program error (P33) will occur. (2) The program format switch command (G188/G189) has no address designation other than G.
  • Page 722 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 15 Program Support Functions 15.13 Program Format Switch; G188/G189 (b) G code modal with G189 available (M system) Group Function name G modal that enables the program format switch (Non-modal) Travel (positioning, interpolation) G00, G01, G02, G03, G02.1, G03.1 Plane selection...
  • Page 723 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 15 Program Support Functions 15.14 Vibration Cutting Control (VCC); G08.5 15.14 Vibration Cutting Control (VCC); G08.5 Function and purpose The low-frequency vibration can be applied to the feed axis in the turning/drilling mode with the vibration cutting con- trol (G08.5) command.
  • Page 724 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 15 Program Support Functions 15.14 Vibration Cutting Control (VCC); G08.5 Feed axis position Spindle rotation position (degree) (e) Cutting zone at the 1st rotation (f) Zone that is cut at the 1st rotation (g) Air-cutting zone that is made by cutting at the 2nd rotation (h) Zone that is cut at the 2nd rotation and dropped as chips Enabling conditions of the function...
  • Page 725 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 15 Program Support Functions 15.14 Vibration Cutting Control (VCC); G08.5 Spindle speed control method There are the following two methods of the spindle rotation speed control method during vibration cutting mode. [Fixed spindle speed selection method] The operation is performed at the spindle rotation speed closest to the S command value of the program among the candidates of spindle rotation speed generated in the NC.
  • Page 726 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 15 Program Support Functions 15.14 Vibration Cutting Control (VCC); G08.5 Detailed description Explanation of address Command Remarks dress range (unit) Issues the vibration cutting mode start/cancel command. The command range is as follows. 0: Cancels the vibration cutting mode.
  • Page 727 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 15 Program Support Functions 15.14 Vibration Cutting Control (VCC); G08.5 Command Remarks dress range (unit) 0.01 to 9.99 Commands the amplitude feed ratio during vibration cutting mode. The amplitude (retract amount at vibration cutting) in the mode is determined from the am- plitude feed ratio and the feed value per spindle rotation.
  • Page 728 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 15 Program Support Functions 15.14 Vibration Cutting Control (VCC); G08.5 Command to invalidate the vibration cutting control temporarily When the ",V0" command is issued in the cutting block (G01/G02/G03) during the vibration cutting mode, the vibra- tion cutting control can be disabled temporarily.
  • Page 729 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 15 Program Support Functions 15.14 Vibration Cutting Control (VCC); G08.5 Relationship with other functions Relationship with other G code functions Column A: Operation to be performed when the combined functions (G code shown in the left) are commanded during vibration cutting mode.
  • Page 730 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 15 Program Support Functions 15.14 Vibration Cutting Control (VCC); G08.5 G code Function name (G code list: 3) - (G12.1, G112(*)) Polar coordinate interpolation ON × (P790) × (P481) - (G13.1, G113(*)) Polar coordinate interpolation cancel ○...
  • Page 731 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 15 Program Support Functions 15.14 Vibration Cutting Control (VCC); G08.5 G code Function name (G code list: 3) Exact stop check mode ○ ○ G61.1 High-accuracy control ON × (P790) × (P791) Automatic corner override ○...
  • Page 732 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 15 Program Support Functions 15.14 Vibration Cutting Control (VCC); G08.5 G code Function name (G code list: 3) G92.1 Workpiece coordinate system preset ○ Constant surface speed control ON (*5) ○ Constant surface speed control cancel (*5) ○...
  • Page 733 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 15 Program Support Functions 15.14 Vibration Cutting Control (VCC); G08.5 (*1) The milling interpolation is not available during the vibration cutting mode. (*2) The vibration cutting mode start command is not available during the milling interpolation mode. (*3) The feed axis vibrates in the cutting block in the fixed cycle.
  • Page 734 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 15 Program Support Functions 15.14 Vibration Cutting Control (VCC); G08.5 Spindle position control (Spindle/C axis control) (1) The axis in the spindle mode can be set as the vibration cutting selection axis. (2) If the spindle selected by the part system in the vibration cutting mode is changed to the C axis mode, the oper- ation error (M01 1300) occurs.
  • Page 735 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 15 Program Support Functions 15.14 Vibration Cutting Control (VCC); G08.5 Sub part system control I/II (1) The sub part system control I/II (G122/G144) can be commanded during the vibration cutting mode. However, the status of the vibration cutting mode is not inherited. (2) The vibration cutting control (G08.5) can be commanded in a sub part system.
  • Page 736 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 15 Program Support Functions 15.14 Vibration Cutting Control (VCC); G08.5 Cutting feed override (1) The cutting feed override can be applied during vibration cutting mode. If the override is changed while the cutting block is being executed, the amplitude also changes by the change in the feedrate.
  • Page 737 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 15 Program Support Functions 15.14 Vibration Cutting Control (VCC); G08.5 NC reset (1) When the "NC reset 1" signal or the "NC reset 2" signal is input in the part system during the vibration cutting mode, the vibration cutting mode is canceled.
  • Page 738 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 15 Program Support Functions 15.14 Vibration Cutting Control (VCC); G08.5 Corner chamfering/Corner R (1) It is possible to issue the corner chamfering or corner R command in the cutting block during the vibration cutting mode.
  • Page 739 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 15 Program Support Functions 15.14 Vibration Cutting Control (VCC); G08.5 Dry run, External deceleration (1) The command speed of dry run and external deceleration are clamped with the parameter "#12571 Vib- Clamp_VCC". The vibration feedrate is also clamped with the parameter "#12586 ActualClamp_VCC". The operation error (M01 1303) occurs when the command speed is clamped, and the operation error (M01 1309) occurs when the vibration feedrate is clamped.
  • Page 740 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 15 Program Support Functions 15.14 Vibration Cutting Control (VCC); G08.5 Precautions (1) Make sure to issue the G08.5 as a single command. If another G code command is included in the same block, the program error (P34) occurs.
  • Page 741 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 15 Program Support Functions 15.15 Two-Dimensional Barcode Engraving Cycle; G136 15.15 Two-Dimensional Barcode Engraving Cycle; G136 Function and purpose This function is used to machine a QR code that stores an arbitrary character string on the machined surface. When the character string to be stored in the QR code is specified, the QR code that stores the entered character string can be machined on the cylindrical surface or plane.
  • Page 742 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 15 Program Support Functions 15.15 Two-Dimensional Barcode Engraving Cycle; G136 Explanation of address Address Meaning Command range Remarks X, Y, Z, α Commanded position If omitted, the current position is set as the (α...
  • Page 743 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 15 Program Support Functions 15.15 Two-Dimensional Barcode Engraving Cycle; G136 QR code length L and cell interval I The QR code can be machined by specifying the QR code length and cell interval by commanding address L or address I.
  • Page 744 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 15 Program Support Functions 15.15 Two-Dimensional Barcode Engraving Cycle; G136 QR code position P By specifying a numeric value from "0" to "4" in address P, the QR code position for the command position can be changed to the position shown below.
  • Page 745 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 15 Program Support Functions 15.15 Two-Dimensional Barcode Engraving Cycle; G136 Detailed description Description of operation The movement command in the G136 command is as follows. Operation of two-dimensional barcode engraving cycle (A) Machining surface (I) Initial point x, y (R) R point...
  • Page 746 CRLF (Linefeed) Note Blank characters, "<", ">", "[", "]", and ";" can be entered using the Mitsubishi Electric standard keyboard. However, to store them in the QR code as characters, command a specific address and numeric value by referring to "(2) Characters by commanding a specific address" described later. If the above symbol is en- tered in square brackets [ ], the program error (P225 or P281) occurs.
  • Page 747 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 15 Program Support Functions 15.15 Two-Dimensional Barcode Engraving Cycle; G136 (2) Characters by commanding a specific address Characters such as date, time and linefeed can be stored in the QR code by commanding a specific address in angle brackets <>.
  • Page 748 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 15 Program Support Functions 15.15 Two-Dimensional Barcode Engraving Cycle; G136 (3) Variable commands By commanding a common variable, local variable, or system variable in angle brackets <>, the numeric value set in each variable can be stored in the QR code as a character string. For the available variables, refer to "14.2 Variable Commands".
  • Page 749 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 15 Program Support Functions 15.15 Two-Dimensional Barcode Engraving Cycle; G136 QR code size The size of the QR code is determined by the QR code length L or cell interval I and the number of cells that make up the QR code.
  • Page 750 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 15 Program Support Functions 15.15 Two-Dimensional Barcode Engraving Cycle; G136 (2) Number of QR code cells The table below shows the maximum number of characters that can be stored in a specific number of cells, as- suming that the total number of cells per side of the QR code is the number of cells.
  • Page 751 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 15 Program Support Functions 15.15 Two-Dimensional Barcode Engraving Cycle; G136 Program example Machine the QR code in the following conditions. Tool diameter: 1 mm Characters to be machined: MELCO Cell interval: 1 mm Error correction level: 3 QR code size: 20 mm ×...
  • Page 752 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 15 Program Support Functions 15.15 Two-Dimensional Barcode Engraving Cycle; G136 Relationship with other functions Relationship between two-dimensional barcode engraving cycle and G code functions Column A: Operation when the two-dimensional barcode engraving cycle (G136) is commanded while the combined function is enabled ○: The two-dimensional barcode engraving cycle command can be issued, and the combined function is also en- abled...
  • Page 753 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 15 Program Support Functions 15.15 Two-Dimensional Barcode Engraving Cycle; G136 Group G code Function name (G code list: 3) Barrier check ON ○ Barrier check OFF ○ - (G22 (*)) Soft limit ON ○...
  • Page 754 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 15 Program Support Functions 15.15 Two-Dimensional Barcode Engraving Cycle; G136 Group G code Function name (G code list: 3) G188 Program format switch ON ○ G189 Program format switch cancel ○ (*) Only applies to G code lists 6 and 7. (*1) High-speed machining mode is disabled.
  • Page 755 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 15 Program Support Functions 15.15 Two-Dimensional Barcode Engraving Cycle; G136 Precautions (1) The two-dimensional barcode engraving cycle cannot be interrupted while it is being commanded. If the com- mand is interrupted, the operation error (M01 0181) occurs. (2) An operator enclosed in brackets [ ] is recognized as a character, so no operation can be performed.
  • Page 756 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 15 Program Support Functions 15.16 Text Engraving Cycle; G135 15.16 Text Engraving Cycle; G135 Function and purpose This function enables to engrave arbitrary text on the machining surface. The specified text can be engraved on the plane or cylindrical surface.
  • Page 757 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 15 Program Support Functions 15.16 Text Engraving Cycle; G135 Explanation of address Address Meaning Command range Remarks X, Y, Z, α Machining start position - If omitted, the current position is set as the (α...
  • Page 758 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 15 Program Support Functions 15.16 Text Engraving Cycle; G135 Text height H and text position P Specify the text height with address "H". The text height is the distance from the descender line to the ascender line. Also, the line that passes between the descender line and the ascender line is referred to as the "center line".
  • Page 759 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 15 Program Support Functions 15.16 Text Engraving Cycle; G135 Text interval L Specify the text interval with address "L". When text is machined on a straight line, the text interval is the "distance of straight line". When text is machined on an arc, the text interval is the "chord length".
  • Page 760 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 15 Program Support Functions 15.16 Text Engraving Cycle; G135 Detailed description Details of operation The movement command in the G135 command is as follows. (r2) (r1) (2), (3), (4) (2), (3), (4) (a) Machining surface (i) Initial point (6), (7) (5) - (7)
  • Page 761 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 15 Program Support Functions 15.16 Text Engraving Cycle; G135 Note (1) Cutting feedrate "F" is the speed that is set after the cutting feed override was applied. (2) As a result of calculation, if engraving feedrate "F´" is less than "1", "F'" operates as "1". (3) During single block mode, the engraving pass and the positioning pass stop for each pass.
  • Page 762 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 15 Program Support Functions 15.16 Text Engraving Cycle; G135 (2) Characters by commanding a specific address You can machine the date and time by specifying the address in the table below in square brackets [ ]. Each address must be enclosed in angle brackets <...
  • Page 763 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 15 Program Support Functions 15.16 Text Engraving Cycle; G135 (3) Variable command By writing "<#Variable number/Number of integer digits . Number of decimal digits>" in [ ], the numerical value set in the variable can be machined as a text. The specifiable variables are common variables, local variables, system variables, and custom variables.
  • Page 764 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 15 Program Support Functions 15.16 Text Engraving Cycle; G135 Relationship with other functions "G135" is a single command. If another G code is commanded in the same block, the program error (P33) occurs. Relationship between text engraving cycle and other functions Column A: Operation when the text engraving cycle (G135) is commanded while the combination function is enabled ○: The text engraving cycle command can be issued, and the combination function is also enabled.
  • Page 765 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 15 Program Support Functions 15.16 Text Engraving Cycle; G135 Group G code Function name (G code list: 3) Barrier check ON ○ Barrier check OFF ○ - (G22 (*)) Soft limit ON ○ - (G23 (*)) Soft limit OFF ○...
  • Page 766 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 15 Program Support Functions 15.16 Text Engraving Cycle; G135 Group G code Function name (G code list: 3) G188 Program format switch ○ G189 Program format switch cancel ○ (*) Only applies to G code lists 6 and 7. (*1) High-speed machining mode is disabled.
  • Page 767 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 15 Program Support Functions 15.17 Chatter Suppression 15.17 Chatter Suppression Function and purpose Chatter suppression is the function that suppresses vibrations (chatter) occurring continuously between a tool and a product to be turned (workpiece) during turning. Machining failures caused by chatter can be reduced by fluctuat- ing spindle speed according to the designated amplitude and period.
  • Page 768 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 15 Program Support Functions 15.17 Chatter Suppression Relationship with other functions (1) The following functions can be used in combination with chatter suppression. Positioning (G00) Rapid traverse block overlap (G0.5) Linear interpolation (G01) Circular/Helical interpolation (G02/G03) Exponential interpolation (G02.3/G03.3) Dwell (G04)
  • Page 769 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 15 Program Support Functions 15.17 Chatter Suppression (2) Chatter suppression is disabled when it is combined with the following functions. High-speed machining mode I/II (G05.1 Q1/G05 P10000) High-accuracy control (G08 P1) Vibration cutting mode (G08.5 P2) Milling interpolation (G12.1/G16) Functions not listed Spindle clamp speed setting...
  • Page 770 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 15 Program Support Functions 15.17 Chatter Suppression Precautions (1) Chatter suppression is enabled during automatic operation. Chatter suppression is not performed for movements by manual mode where automatic operation is not performed. (2) Coil switching cannot be performed during chatter suppression. (3) Fluctuation conditions can be changed without stopping the spindle during chatter suppression.
  • Page 771 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 15 Program Support Functions 15.17 Chatter Suppression IB-1501620-H...
  • Page 772 Multi-part System Control IB-1501620-H...
  • Page 773 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.1 Timing Synchronization Operation 16Multi-part System Control 16.1 Timing Synchronization Operation CAUTION When programming a multi-part system, carefully observe the movements caused by other part systems' pro- grams. 16.1.1 Timing Synchronization Operation (! code) !n (!m ...) L Function and purpose Multiple machining programs can be operated independently at same time for multi-axis and multi-part system mixed control CNC.
  • Page 774 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.1 Timing Synchronization Operation Command format !n (!m ...) L_ ; !n, !m, ... Timing synchronization operation (!) and part system No. (1 - number of part system that can be used) Follows the settings of the parameter "#19419 Timing sync system"...
  • Page 775 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.1 Timing Synchronization Operation (2) Timing synchronization between three part systems and more Similarly with three part systems or more, when all part systems that are included in the timing synchronization operation reach timing synchronization block, these part systems start operating from the next block simultane- ously.
  • Page 776 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.1 Timing Synchronization Operation Command in the same block as timing synchronization operation (1) The timing synchronization operation command is normally issued alone in a block. However, if a movement command or M, S or T command is issued in the same block, whether to synchronize after the movement com- mand or M, S or T command or to execute the movement command or M, S or T command after synchronization will depend on the MTB specifications (parameter "#1093 Wmvfin").
  • Page 777 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.1 Timing Synchronization Operation 16.1.2 Timing Synchronization Operation with Start Point Designated (Type 1) ; G115 Function and purpose The part system can wait for the other part system to reach the start point before starting itself. The start point can be set in the middle of a block.
  • Page 778 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.1 Timing Synchronization Operation Detailed description (1)Designate the start point using the workpiece coordinates of the other part system (ex. $2). (2)The start point check is executed only for the axis designated by G115. (Example) !L2 G115 X100.
  • Page 779 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.1 Timing Synchronization Operation (7)The timing synchronization status continues when the G115 command has been duplicated between part sys- tems. (Operations will not restart.) !2 G115 Timing synchronizing !1 G115 (8) The single block stop function does not apply for the G115 block.
  • Page 780 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.1 Timing Synchronization Operation 16.1.3 Timing Synchronization Operation with Start Point Designated (Type 2) ; G116 Function and purpose The own part system can make the other part system to wait until it reaches the start point. The start point can be set in the middle of a block.
  • Page 781 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.1 Timing Synchronization Operation Detailed description (1) Designate the start point using the workpiece coordinates of the own part system (ex. $1). (2) The start point check is executed only for the axis designated by G116. (Example) !L1 G116 X100.
  • Page 782 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.1 Timing Synchronization Operation (8) When G116 is commanded between the 3 part systems, two of the other part systems will start at the same time. (9) The single block stop function does not apply for the G116 block. (10) A program error (P32) will occur if an address other than an axis is designated in G116 command block.
  • Page 783 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.1 Timing Synchronization Operation 16.1.4 Timing Synchronization Operation Function Using M codes ; M*** Function and purpose The timing synchronization operation function between part systems is conventionally commanded with the "!" code, but by using this function, the part systems can be waited with the M code commanded in the machining program.
  • Page 784 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.1 Timing Synchronization Operation Detailed description (1) When the timing synchronization operation M code is commanded in the machining program, the two part sys- tems will be waited and operation will start in the commanded block. If the timing synchronization operation M code is commanded in either part system during automatic operation, the system will wait for the same M code to be commanded in the other part system before executing the next block.
  • Page 785 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.1 Timing Synchronization Operation (3) The part systems are waited with the M code following the parameters below. These settings depend on the MTB specifications. Refer to these settings. For details, refer to the specifications of your machine.
  • Page 786 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.1 Timing Synchronization Operation Precautions For precautions for time synchronization, also refer to "16.1.1 Timing Synchronization Operation (! code) !n (!m ...) L". (1) During timing synchronization operation with the M code, always command the M code alone in a block. (2) While standing by after commanding the timing synchronization operation M code in one part system, the oper- ation error (M01 1030) occurs if a different M code is commanded in the other part system.
  • Page 787 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.1 Timing Synchronization Operation 16.1.5 Timing Synchronization When Timing Synchronization Ignore Is Set Function and purpose While the "Waiting ignore" signal (YCD0) is ON, timing synchronization operation of that part system is ignored. (This depends on the MTB specifications.) With a 2-part system, if the "Waiting ignore"...
  • Page 788 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.1 Timing Synchronization Operation (2) A case that "Does not ignore the timing synchronization regardless of whether or not in automatic operation" Necessarily conduct timing synchronization !n !m L_ ; Timing synchronization !i !n L_ ;...
  • Page 789 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.1 Timing Synchronization Operation (3) A case that "Ignores the timing synchronization regardless of whether or not in automatic operation" Timing synchronization operation ignore signal ON Ignore timing synchronization !n !m L_ ;...
  • Page 790 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.2 Balance Cut ; G15,G14 16.2 Balance Cut ; G15,G14 Function and purpose The timing for starting the operation of the 1st part system turret and 2nd part system turret can be synchronized. When workpiece that is relatively long and thin is machined on a lathe, deflection may result, making it impossible for the workpiece to be machined with any accuracy.
  • Page 791 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.2 Balance Cut ; G15,G14 Detailed description (1) G15 must be commanded alone in a block, which also applies to G14. (2) G15 and G14 commands are modals. In the CNC's initial state, the G14 balance cut command is OFF. (3) When G15 is commanded, movement will standby until G14 is commanded or until the modal information is cleared by the reset signal.
  • Page 792 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.2 Balance Cut ; G15,G14 Operation example The following is an operation example of balance cut on the 1st and the 2nd part systems as per the specification for executing timing synchronization on cutting feed blocks only. -100 <1st part system>...
  • Page 793 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.2 Balance Cut ; G15,G14 Precautions Synchronization during movement This function simultaneously starts the block for both part systems. The following synchronization will change ac- cording to the movement amount and feedrate, etc., and thus cannot be guaranteed. To move in complete synchro- nization, the movement amount and feedrate must be set to the same values.
  • Page 794 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.2 Balance Cut ; G15,G14 Macro interruption during timing synchronization (Type 1) Do not carry out macro interruption (Type 1) in a part system waiting with G15 command. Doing so will result in the following operation.
  • Page 795 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.3 Mixed Control 16.3 Mixed Control 16.3.1 Cross Axis Control ;G110 Function and purpose This function enables any axis to be replaced by another axis between part systems. This makes it possible to perform operations which are not possible with regular axis configurations; for instance, tools which are provided only on part system 1 can be used for machining on part system 2.
  • Page 796 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.3 Mixed Control Detailed description (1) 2-digit axis name For two or more part systems, the same axis name may exist in each part system. To distinguish the name, dis- play 2-digit axis name set by the parameter "#1022 axname2".
  • Page 797 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.3 Mixed Control Relationship with other functions (1) Coordinate system The coordinate information, such as a reference position, machine coordinate zero point and workpiece coordi- nate zero point, is decided for each axis. Therefore, the coordinate systems are also switched when the axes are switched by the mixed control.
  • Page 798 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.3 Mixed Control (5) Chuck barrier/tailstock barrier The chuck barrier/tailstock barrier is the tool nose point entry prohibited area of the tool, which is configured with the axis parameter setting value of the 1st axis and 2nd axis. In across part systems where the zero points differ, each parameter needs to be set again to validate the chuck barrier/tailstock barrier after the mixed control.
  • Page 799 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.3 Mixed Control Other precautions (1) A command which duplicates the existing axis and the command address by the mixed control cannot be exe- cuted. If this type of command is given, a program error (P11) will occur. (2) Tool compensation amount holds the value before the mixed control even after the mixed control was carried out.
  • Page 800 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.3 Mixed Control 16.3.2 Arbitrary Axis Exchange ; G140, G141, G142 Function and purpose With this function, an arbitrary axis can be exchanged freely across part systems. The machining can be freer in the multiple part systems by exchanging an axis that can be commanded for machin- ing programs in each part system.
  • Page 801 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.3 Mixed Control This chapter illustrates an example based on the basic axis configuration below. X axis Z axis Y axis C axis 1st part system ($1) 2nd part system ($2) Command format When commanding the arbitrary axis exchange G140 command address = axis address ...
  • Page 802 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.3 Mixed Control Detailed description Arbitrary axis exchange command (G140) There are two methods for axis exchange operations with arbitrary axis exchange command (G140). The methods for your machine depends on the MTB specifications (parameter "#1434 G140Type2"). Method Operation Method for exchanging all axes...
  • Page 803 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.3 Mixed Control (2) Operation example of the method for exchanging command axes ("#1434 G140Type2" is set to "1") Below is the control axis of each part system when running the following machining programs (1st part system, 2nd part system) Control axes Uncontrol...
  • Page 804 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.3 Mixed Control Arbitrary axis exchange return command (G141) The arbitrary axis exchange return command (G141) returns the control right of the axis, exchanged by the previous arbitrary axis exchange command (G140) in the commanded part system, to the state before the axis exchange. However, it is the axis that remains an uncontrol axis by the arbitrary axis exchange return command (G140) that returns the control right to the part system which was commanded the arbitrary axis exchange return command (G141).
  • Page 805 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.3 Mixed Control Reference axis arrange return command (G142) Reference axis arrange return command (G142) returns the control right of the axis, exchanged by the arbitrary axis exchange command (G140) in the commanded part system, to the power-ON state. Executing the arbitrary axis exchange command (G140) multiple times may make it impossible to return the control right of the axis to the reference axis arrange with the arbitrary axis exchange return command (G141).
  • Page 806 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.3 Mixed Control Unavailable state of axis exchange "Unavailable state of axis exchange" indicates a "condition in which a target axis for axis exchange is not available for exchange because the designated target axis for axis exchange is being used by other part systems or for other reasons"...
  • Page 807 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.3 Mixed Control Applied to Conditions In the part system which contains the target axis for axis exchange, any of the following Part system which contains the target commands is programmed in the next block of the timing synchronization. axis for axis ex- Reference position return (G28, G30) change...
  • Page 808 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.3 Mixed Control Applied to Conditions Target axis for axis After the axis was exchanged/acquired by the arbitrary axis exchange command (G140), exchange the arbitrary axis exchange return command (G141) was executed with the axis pulled out by the arbitrary axis exchange command (G140) or the reference axis arrange return command (G142).
  • Page 809 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.3 Mixed Control Caution to be observed on coordinate systems The machine specific zero point and the reference point of each axis are not changed by the arbitrary axis exchange command (G140).
  • Page 810 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.3 Mixed Control (2) Creating a machining program for multiple part systems The arbitrary axis exchange control exchanges axes if the declared axis is available for exchange. As a result, it may lose the control right of the axis during machining, depending on the timing.
  • Page 811 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.3 Mixed Control Example of the arbitrary axis exchange return command (G141) (1) Using the arbitrary axis exchange return command (G141) Machining program Machining program G140 X=X1 Z=Z1 Y=Y1; G140 X=X2 Z=Z2 C=C2;...
  • Page 812 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.3 Mixed Control Relationship with other functions Plane selection For the part system where the axes are switched by the arbitrary axis exchange command (G140), the arbitrary axis exchange return command (G141) or the reference axis arrange return command (G142), the plane is configured with the switched axis.
  • Page 813 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.3 Mixed Control Resetting Depending on the MTB specifications (parameter "#1280 ext16/bit1"), the axis of the part system that was reset will be returned to the reference axis arrange or remain in the condition after the axis exchange. (1) When the parameter is invalid ("#1280 ext16/bit1"...
  • Page 814 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.3 Mixed Control (b) When the parameter is valid ("#1435 crsman" is set to "1") Even when the axis for manual operation is not in the reference axis arrange, manual operation can be car- ried out.
  • Page 815 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.3 Mixed Control Sub part system control I (1) The axis arrange of the sub part system when turning ON the power, when resetting, when issuing the reference axis arrange return command (G142) or when terminating the sub part system depends on the MTB specifica- tions (parameter "#1280 ext16/bit1", "#1753 cfgPR03/bit3").
  • Page 816 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.3 Mixed Control Sub part system control II (1) The axis arrange of the sub part system at power ON, when resetting, at emergency stop, when issuing the ref- erence axis arrange return command (G142), or when terminating the sub part system is as follows.
  • Page 817 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.3 Mixed Control Soft limit Soft limit is carried out using axis parameter setting value. Soft limit I and II define the movement range of the axis, and it is valid even during the arbitrary axis exchange con- trol.
  • Page 818 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.3 Mixed Control Axis name extension Because in the environment where the arbitrary axis exchange control is available, only the name of name-unex- tended axis can be designated to the parameters "#12071 adr_abs[1]" to "#12078 adr_abs[8]", other axes cannot be assigned to the command axis name of name-extended axis.
  • Page 819 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.3 Mixed Control Precautions and restrictions Common precautions/restrictions for G140, G141 and G142 (1) When the arbitrary axis exchange command (G140), the arbitrary axis exchange return command (G141) or the reference axis arrange return command (G142) is issued in a part system in any of the following mode, the pro- gram error (P501) will occur.
  • Page 820 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.3 Mixed Control (7) If the arbitrary axis exchange (G140) command is issued during 3-dimensional tool radius compensation (tool's vertical-direction compensation) modal, a program error (P162) will occur. Also, if the reset with the modal re- tention ("#1151 rstint"...
  • Page 821 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.3 Mixed Control (14) When the parameters "#1280 ext16/bit1" and "#1753 cfgPR03/bit3" are set to the following values, the method to restore the reference axis arrange is as follows. #1280 ext16/bit1 #1753 cfgPR03/bit3 Method to restore the reference axis...
  • Page 822 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.3 Mixed Control (5) If the arbitrary axis exchange command (G140) is issued in the method for exchanging command axes ("#1434 G140Type2" is set to "1") when an axis, which lost the control right of axis in the arbitrary axis exchange com- mand (G140) from other part systems, exists, the operations will be as follows.
  • Page 823 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.4 Control Axis Superimposition 16.4 Control Axis Superimposition 16.4.1 Control Axis Superimposition ; G126 Function and purpose This function enables superimposition on and control of an axis in a selected part system with an axis in another part system.
  • Page 824 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.4 Control Axis Superimposition (Example) Reference axis: Z1, superimposed axis: Z2. The zero point in the figure indicates the 2nd part system workpiece coordinate zero point. ($1) ($1) (W2) ($2) Z1 actual movement amount = Z1 commanded movement amount Z2 commanded movement amount...
  • Page 825 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.4 Control Axis Superimposition Command format Superimposition start G126 Superimposed axis name = Reference axis name (,P__) ; Superimposed The axis to be operated as superimposed axis (The axis name set in the parameter (#1022 axis name axname2) (two characters)) Reference axis...
  • Page 826 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.4 Control Axis Superimposition 2-axis superimposition start operation The following operation example explains the start command to superimpose Z2 axis onto Z1 axis. Command : G126 Z2 = Z1 ,Pp ; The superimposition start command automatically executes the following operation.
  • Page 827 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.4 Control Axis Superimposition (b) Relative polarity (negative) (the value of "#2143 polar" is "0" for the reference axis and "1" for the superim- posed axis) Relative distance of basic machine coordinate zero point (#2144 baseps) Z1 axis basic machine coordinate system Z1 axis workpiece zero point...
  • Page 828 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.4 Control Axis Superimposition Operation during superimposition [Workpiece coordinate system of the superimposed axis] When the movement of reference axis is executed, the superimposed axis workpiece coordinate zero point moves according to the movement of the superimposed axis.
  • Page 829 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.4 Control Axis Superimposition (2) When commanding movement only to the superimposed axis If a movement command is issued only to the superimposed axis and not to the reference axis when the control axis is superimposed, the superimposed axis actual movement amount equals to that of the reference axis.
  • Page 830 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.4 Control Axis Superimposition The feedrate of the reference axis and superimposed axis (superimposition of 2 axes and 3 axes tandem su- perimposition) (1) Operation in the superimposition of 2 axes If the movement command is issued to both the reference axis and the superimposed axis, the movement rate of the superimposed axis will be faster than when the movement is commanded only by the superimposed axis as long as the moving direction of the superimposed axis synchronized with the reference axis movement is the...
  • Page 831 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.4 Control Axis Superimposition (2) Operation in the 3 axes tandem superimposition As with the case of superimposition of 2 axes, depending on the movement direction of the reference axis, the 1st imposed axis and the 2nd imposed axis, the feed rate may be faster than the rate of movement by the com- mand of the 1st imposed axis or the 2nd imposed axis.
  • Page 832 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.4 Control Axis Superimposition (b) Rapid traverse rate and clamp rate of the 1st superimposed axis Reference axis 2nd superim- 1st superimposed axis posed axis Stop Rapid traverse Cutting feed Stop Stop Stop...
  • Page 833 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.4 Control Axis Superimposition (c) Rapid traverse rate and clamp rate of the 2nd superimposed axis Reference axis 1st superim- 2nd superimposed axis posed axis Stop Rapid traverse Cutting feed Stop Stop Stop...
  • Page 834 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.4 Control Axis Superimposition Composition of axis movement for superimposed axis For details on "rapid" and "clamp" in the figure, refer to the section "The feedrate of the reference axis and superim- posed axis".
  • Page 835 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.4 Control Axis Superimposition (2) 3 axes tandem superimposition (example of reference axis Z1, 1st superimposed axis Z2, and 2nd superimposed axis Z3) In the figure, Z1 shows the operation of the reference axis only, Z2 shows the operation of superimposed axis only, Z2' shows the operation example of ((reference axis) + (1st superimposed axis), Z3' shows the operation example of ((reference axis) + (1st superimposed axis) + (2nd superimposed axis)).
  • Page 836 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.4 Control Axis Superimposition End of superimposition of 2 axes This section shows the examples of executing an ending operation when the Z2 axis is superimposed onto Z1 axis. Command: G126 Z2 ;...
  • Page 837 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.4 Control Axis Superimposition Program example Example of superimposition of 2 axis (1) When commanding from the part system containing the reference axis [1st part system] [2nd part system] Operation N10 !L1;...
  • Page 838 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.4 Control Axis Superimposition Example of superimposition of 3 axis [1st part system] [2nd part system] [3rd part system] Operation N10 !2L1; N20 !1L1; N21 G126 Z2=Z1; Z2 axis starts superimposing on Z1 axis N11 !2L2;...
  • Page 839 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.4 Control Axis Superimposition Relationship with other functions Functions which cannot be used during control axis superimposition (1) The operation error (M01 1003) will occur if the following commands are issued to the superimposed axis and reference axis during the control axis superimposition.
  • Page 840 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.4 Control Axis Superimposition (3) If any of the following axes is specified as the related axis of control axis superimposition, the program error (P520) will occur. Basis axis of inclined axis control/selection axis of inclined axis control (axis whose parameter "#2071 s_axis"...
  • Page 841 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.4 Control Axis Superimposition Function name Operation High-speed synchronous tapping When the high-speed synchronous tapping is performed with the super- imposed axis, an in-position check is performed at R point as in-position check cannot be canceled for traveling from the initial point to R point be- cause of the data communication specification between NC and the drive unit.
  • Page 842 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.4 Control Axis Superimposition Function name Operation Rotation center error compensation [Operation in 2-axis superimposition] Perform the rotation center error compensation for the reference axis. When the rotation center error compensation is performed for the su- perimposed axis, only the superimposed axis is compensated for.
  • Page 843 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.4 Control Axis Superimposition Precautions Superimposition start command and precautions during operation (1) The superimposition start command can be issued from a part system which does not contain the superimposed axis/reference axis.
  • Page 844 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.4 Control Axis Superimposition Other precautions (1) When being reset during the superimposition, the operation depends on the MTB specifications (parameter "#1280 ext16/bit3"). (2) A timing synchronization operation must be conducted in the block just before the superimposition start/end com- mand, in order to stop the superimposed axis/reference axis and maintain timing between the superimposed axis/reference axis.
  • Page 845 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.4 Control Axis Superimposition (14) If the address P of G126 is commanded from an axis which does not contain the superimposed axis, the setting of workpiece zero point by the address P will become valid from the block which is next to the block being exe- cuted in the part system containing the superimposed axis.
  • Page 846 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.4 Control Axis Superimposition 16.4.2 Arbitrary Axis Superimposition ; G156 Function and purpose With this function, the arbitrary control axis in other part systems can be moved by superimposing on the movement command for the arbitrary control axis in own part system.
  • Page 847 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.4 Control Axis Superimposition The following describes the meanings of the terms used in this specification. Term Meaning Reference axis The basic in the arbitrary axis superimposition function (moves only by its own axis command).
  • Page 848 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.4 Control Axis Superimposition Command format Arbitrary axis superimposition start command G156 Superimposed axis name = Reference axis name , P_ D_ R_ F_; Superimposed axis name The axis to be operated as superimposed axis (The axis name set in the parameter "#1022 axname2"...
  • Page 849 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.4 Control Axis Superimposition Arbitrary axis superimposition end command G156 Superimposed axis name, Q/R_ F_; Superimposed axis name The axis to be operated as superimposed axis (The axis name set in the parameter "#1022 axname2"...
  • Page 850 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.4 Control Axis Superimposition Detailed description The following operation example explains the a case when superimposing Z2 axis (superimposed axis) onto Z1 axis (reference axis). Z1: Reference axis Z2: Superimposed axis Operation of each axis when the arbitrary axis superimposition start is commanded The operation of the superimposition start command differs according to the state of the related axis of arbitrary axis superimposition.
  • Page 851 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.4 Control Axis Superimposition (2) If the reference axis is moving when the arbitrary axis superimposition start is commanded from the superim- posed axis part system (a) The operation will wait until smoothing for all axes of the reference axis part system reached zero. (b) Set the superimposed axis workpiece zero point by a P command, D command, and the relative distance of the basic machine zero point between the reference axis (Z1) and the superimposed axis (Z2) (parameter "#2144 baseps").
  • Page 852 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.4 Control Axis Superimposition Workpiece coordinate and tool compensation when the arbitrary axis superimposition start is commanded Command:G156 Z2=Z1 , Pp Dd Rr; The following operation example explains the start command to superimpose Z2 axis onto Z1 axis while the rela- tionship between the workpiece coordinate, tool compensation, and addresses P, D and R, when the arbitrary axis superimposition start is commanded is as shown below.
  • Page 853 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.4 Control Axis Superimposition (b) Relative polarity (negative) (the value of "#2143 polar" is "0" for the reference axis and "1" for the superim- posed axis) Relative distance of basic machine coordinate zero point (#2144 baseps) Z1 axis basic machine coordinate system...
  • Page 854 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.4 Control Axis Superimposition Feedrate of the reference axis and superimposed axis If the movement command is issued to both the reference axis and the superimposed axis, the movement rate of the superimposed axis will be faster than when the movement is commanded only by the superimposed axis as long as the moving direction of the superimposed axis synchronized with the reference axis movement is the same as that commanded only by the superimposed axis.
  • Page 855 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.4 Control Axis Superimposition In case of a 2-axis superimposition (where there are two superimposed axes while there is one reference axis), the rapid traverse rate and clamp rate of the superimposed axis are calculated according to the following table. The rapid traverse rate and clamp rate of the reference axis is calculated using either one of the smaller that are determined according to the above table, from the relationship between the reference axis and the superimposed axis of the respective sets of superimposition.
  • Page 856 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.4 Control Axis Superimposition Operation of each axis when the arbitrary axis superimposition end is commanded The following explains the end operation from the arbitrary axis superimposition state of Z1 axis (reference axis) and Z2 axis (superimposed axis).
  • Page 857 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.4 Control Axis Superimposition (2) If the reference axis is moving when the arbitrary axis superimposition end is commanded (a) The operation will wait until smoothing for all axes of the reference axis part system reached zero. (*1) (b) Return to the normal the acceleration/deceleration time constant of the reference axis and superimposed ax- (c) Return the superimposed axis workpiece coordinate zero point to where it was before the superimposition command was issued.
  • Page 858 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.4 Control Axis Superimposition (2) Arbitrary axis superimposition end (R command) (Where the superimposition control end position is designated by a position on the workpiece coordinate system) Command:G156 Z2 , Rr; The superimposition tool compensation amount is assumed as "tp".
  • Page 859 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.4 Control Axis Superimposition (2) Arbitrary axis superimposition command of Z1 axis (reference axis), Z2 axis (superimposed axis 1) and Z3 axis (superimposed axis 2) [1st part system] [2nd part system] [3rd part system] Operation G00 Z25.;...
  • Page 860 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.4 Control Axis Superimposition Axes that cannot be specified as the related axis of arbitrary axis superimposition (1) If an axis of the part system, for which either of the following functions is being executed, is specified as the re- lated axis of arbitrary axis superimposition, these functions will be canceled temporarily, and the control axis su- perimposition will be enabled.
  • Page 861 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.4 Control Axis Superimposition Function name Operation Servo OFF The superimposition will be canceled if a "Servo OFF" signal is entered to the superimposed axis/reference axis in the control axis superimposition. Make sure that the superimposed axis/reference axis is stopped before entering a "Servo OFF"...
  • Page 862 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.4 Control Axis Superimposition Precautions and restrictions (1) Designate the superimposed axis/reference axis using the name set in the parameter "#1022 axname2". A program error (P520) will occur if a name that is not set in the parameter is designated. The axis name specified in G156 needs to be 2 digits.
  • Page 863 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.5 Control Axis Synchronization between Part Systems ; G125 16.5 Control Axis Synchronization between Part Systems ; G125 Function and purpose This function enables an arbitrary control axis in the other part system to move in synchronization with the movement command assigned to an arbitrary control axis.
  • Page 864 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.5 Control Axis Synchronization between Part Systems ; G125 Command format Synchronization start G125 Synchronized axis name = Reference axis name ; Synchronized axis Synchronized axis name (Axis name set in the parameter "#1022 axname2") name Reference axis Reference axis name (Axis name set in the parameter "#1022 axname2)
  • Page 865 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.5 Control Axis Synchronization between Part Systems ; G125 Detailed description This example describes a case to synchronize the Z2 axis with the Z1 axis. Synchronization start (1) Waits until all the axes stop in the part systems including the Z1 axis and the part systems including the Z2 axis.
  • Page 866 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.5 Control Axis Synchronization between Part Systems ; G125 Program example When commanding from the part system containing the reference axis Program Operation Program Operation N10 !L1; --- N20 !L1; N11 G125 Z2=Z1;...
  • Page 867 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.5 Control Axis Synchronization between Part Systems ; G125 When commanding from a part system containing neither the synchronized axis nor reference axis Program Operation Program Operation Program Operation N10 !2!3L1;...
  • Page 868 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.5 Control Axis Synchronization between Part Systems ; G125 Relationship with other functions Functions that are not available during control axis synchronization between part systems (1) The operation error (M01 1038) occurs in the following cases: (a) The following commands are issued to the synchronized axis.
  • Page 869 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.5 Control Axis Synchronization between Part Systems ; G125 Axes that cannot be designated as the axis related to the control axis synchronization between part systems (1) The operation error (M01 1037) occurs in the following cases: (a) Any of the following axes is designated as the synchronized axis.
  • Page 870 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.5 Control Axis Synchronization between Part Systems ; G125 Function name Operation Operation is different between the reference axis and inclined axis for inclined Inclined axis control axis control. Whether or not the target is the reference axis or inclined axis for inclined axis control is determined by the setting value of the parameter "#2071 s_axis"...
  • Page 871 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.5 Control Axis Synchronization between Part Systems ; G125 Function name Operation While the control axis synchronization between part systems is being execut- Rotation center error compen- ed, rotation center error compensation amount of the reference axis is applied sation to the synchronized axis.
  • Page 872 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.5 Control Axis Synchronization between Part Systems ; G125 Precautions for control axis synchronization between part systems I (1) If G125 is commanded where control axis synchronization between part systems II is selected (*1), the program error (P610) occurs.
  • Page 873 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.6 Multi-part System Simultaneous Thread Cutting Cycle 16.6 Multi-part System Simultaneous Thread Cutting Cycle Function and purpose Multi-part system simultaneous thread cutting allows multiple part systems to perform thread cutting simultaneously on one spindle.
  • Page 874 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.6 Multi-part System Simultaneous Thread Cutting Cycle 16.6.2 Multi-part System Simultaneous Thread Cutting Cycle I ; G76.1 Command format G76.1 X/U__ Z/W__ R__ P__ Q__ J__ F__ ; X-axis end point coordinates of thread section (absolute or incremental position) Z-axis end point coordinates of thread section (absolute or incremental position) Taper height component (radius value) for thread A straight thread is created when "0"...
  • Page 875 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.6 Multi-part System Simultaneous Thread Cutting Cycle Thread cutting will start simultaneously after waiting for the 1st and 2nd part systems. Command for 1st part system Command for 2nd part system (Example 2) When "J134"...
  • Page 876 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.6 Multi-part System Simultaneous Thread Cutting Cycle (2) In a multi-part system simultaneous thread cutting cycle, waiting is done at the start and end of the thread cutting process. However, in multi-part system simultaneous thread cutting cycle I (G76.1), waiting in one cycle can be disabled depending on the MTB specifications (parameter "#1242 set14/bit0").
  • Page 877 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.6 Multi-part System Simultaneous Thread Cutting Cycle 16.6.3 Two-part System Simultaneous Thread Cutting Cycle ll ; G76.2 Command format G76.2 X/U__ Z/W__ R__ P__ Q__ Aa F__ ; (1) Thread cutting start shift angle The thread cutting command starts movement after waiting for the spindle encoder's one rotation synchronization signal.
  • Page 878 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.6 Multi-part System Simultaneous Thread Cutting Cycle Detailed description (1) When G76.2 is issued by 1st part system and 2nd part system, waiting is done until the command is issued to another part system.
  • Page 879 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.6 Multi-part System Simultaneous Thread Cutting Cycle (3) In one cycle, waiting is done at the start and end of the thread cutting. Timing synchronization operation (4) The same precautions for thread cutting command (G33), thread cutting cycle (G78) and compound thread cut- ting cycle (G76) apply to this cycle.
  • Page 880 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.7 Multi-part System Simultaneous Thread Cutting Cycle (MITSUBISHI CNC Special Format) ; G76.1, G76.2 16.7 Multi-part System Simultaneous Thread Cutting Cycle (MITSUBISHI CNC Special Format) ; G76.1, G76.2 Function and purpose Multi-part system simultaneous thread cutting allows different part systems to perform thread cutting simultaneously on one spindle.
  • Page 881 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.7 Multi-part System Simultaneous Thread Cutting Cycle (MITSUBISHI CNC Special Format) ; G76.1, G76.2 (*2) If the J address is omitted, the part system where G76.1 has been commanded or the part system that has been set in the parameter "#19419 Timing sync system"...
  • Page 882 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.7 Multi-part System Simultaneous Thread Cutting Cycle (MITSUBISHI CNC Special Format) ; G76.1, G76.2 Relationship with Other Functions The modal must be set as shown below when commanding G76.1/G76.2. Function G code Cylindrical interpolation cancel...
  • Page 883 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.8 Synchronization between Part Systems 16.8 Synchronization between Part Systems 16.8.1 Dwell/Miscellaneous Function Time Override Function and purpose Override can be applied to dwell time and miscellaneous function finish wait time of all part systems. The synchro- nization between part systems can be maintained when the multiple machining programs are operated with override in the multiaxis and multi-part system mixed control CNC.
  • Page 884 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.8 Synchronization between Part Systems (3) Override 50% when this function is valid Feed time, dwell time and miscellaneous function finish wait time double in the operation with override 50%. The synchronization between part systems are maintained and the cutting- off machining stars after the completion of the turning machining.
  • Page 885 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.8 Synchronization between Part Systems Relationship with Other Functions Dwell (revolution-based designation) This function is invalid for the dwell (revolution-based designation) command. M code output during axis traveling This function is also valid for the miscellaneous functions output by the M code output while axis is moving. Miscellaneous functions multiple codes in 1 block This function is valid if multiple miscellaneous functions are issued in one block.
  • Page 886 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.8 Synchronization between Part Systems Precautions (1) When operating the machine by applying override, set the cutting feed override and the rapid traverse override to the same rate on all part systems. Otherwise, part systems will be out of synchronization with one another. (2) Setting the cutting feed override exceeding 100% will not shorten the miscellaneous function time.
  • Page 887 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.8 Synchronization between Part Systems 16.8.2 Synchronization between Part Systems OFF Function and purpose To cancel synchronization with other part systems by single block operation with part systems synchronized, this function disables synchronization between part systems in a part of the machining program.
  • Page 888 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.8 Synchronization between Part Systems Detailed description By substituting a value in the system variable #3003, the validity of each function can be selected. Refer to the system variable list for details of each system variable. Select Synchronization between part systems OFF in the system variable #3003/bit3.
  • Page 889 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.9 Sub Part System Control 16.9 Sub Part System Control 16.9.1 Sub Part System Control I; G122 Function and purpose This function activates and operates any non-operating part system (sub part system) in the multi-part system. Sub part system control I can be used in the same manner as calling subprogram in a non-operating part system.
  • Page 890 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.9 Sub Part System Control The sub part system control I differs from the sub part system control II as follows. Sub part system control I: Main part system and sub part system depend on the MTB specifications, respec- tively.
  • Page 891 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.9 Sub Part System Control Command format Call sub part system G122 A__P__Q__K__D__B__H__ (argument); (For G code lists 2 to 5) G122 <file name> P__Q__K__D__B__H__ (argument); (For G code lists 2 to 5) G153 A__P__Q__K__D__B__H__ (argument);...
  • Page 892 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.9 Sub Part System Control Detailed description This function can be used in multi-part systems of two or more part systems. Main part system and sub part system are switched according to the MTB specifications. Description of each address Address Meaning...
  • Page 893 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.9 Sub Part System Control (*2) If a sub part system ends by M99 or the end sequence No., resetting processing is performed automatically in the sub part system. In this case, the "In reset" signal (XC15) turns ON. To initialize the G command modal by the reset when a sub part system is completed, command "H1"...
  • Page 894 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.9 Sub Part System Control Activation part system of a sub part system When issuing the sub part system control I command, designate the sub part system identification No. with com- mand address B.
  • Page 895 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.9 Sub Part System Control Operation program of a sub part system When issuing the sub part system control I command, designate the program No. or program name to be operated in the sub part system with command address A or <file name>.
  • Page 896 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.9 Sub Part System Control (2) When the multi-part system program management is disabled ("#1285 ext21/bit0" is set to "0") Calling part system ($1) O100 Sub part system ($7) G122 A100 D0 B3；...
  • Page 897 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.9 Sub Part System Control Activation of a sub part system with parallel processing mode (D=1) If "1" is designated for command address D when the sub part system control I command is issued, the following blocks of the calling part system and the first and the following blocks of the sub part system will be operated in parallel.
  • Page 898 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.9 Sub Part System Control Activate a sub part system from another sub part system A sub part system can be activated from another sub part system. The number of sub part systems to be processed simultaneously depends on the model. The following shows the operation and the activation timing of each part system.
  • Page 899 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.9 Sub Part System Control Sub part system activation command to a sub part system being activated If G122 is commanded while a sub part system is being activated, using the same identification No. (B command), the machine will wait for the earlier sub part system to complete activation, before activating the next sub part sys- tem.
  • Page 900 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.9 Sub Part System Control Operation example In the following example, the machining start timing is accelerated by controlling auxiliary axis with a sub part system and operating the main part system and the sub part system in parallel. The tool positioning starts to the machining start point at the same time (time T1) as the start of gantry retract by using sub part system completion wait cancel command (G145) in the flow from mounting the workpiece to moving to cut start position, after feeding and mounting the workpiece with the gantry, in order to reduce the cycle time.
  • Page 901 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.9 Sub Part System Control (1) Machining process when sub part system control is OFF Main part system ($1) G140 X=X2 Z=Z2; ... (a) G00 X50.; G00 Z20.; M20; ...
  • Page 902 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.9 Sub Part System Control Relationship with other functions Timing synchronization with sub part system While a sub part system is under control, timing synchronization between part systems can be issued with the "![Part system No.]"...
  • Page 903 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.9 Sub Part System Control Timing synchronization operation ignore signal Whether to ignore the "![Sub part system identification No.]" command or not depends on the MTB specifications. (Setting of parameter "#1279 ext15/bit0" and the following PLC signals) PLC signal for ignor- Operation #1279...
  • Page 904 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.9 Sub Part System Control Resetting (1) If the NC reset signal is input to the main part system, the operation of the main part system will be reset and end immediately.
  • Page 905 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.9 Sub Part System Control Precautions (1) The sub part system control I command (G122) is a G code that must be issued alone. If another G code is com- manded in the same block, a program error (P651) or (P32) occurs.
  • Page 906 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.9 Sub Part System Control 16.9.2 Sub Part System Control II ; G144 Function and purpose This function activates a sub part system (called part system) by issuing the G144 command in an arbitrary part system (calling part system).
  • Page 907 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.9 Sub Part System Control Cancel the standby status for completion of sub part system (command of a sub part system side that is is- sued when the D0 command is issued) G145;...
  • Page 908 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.9 Sub Part System Control Address Meaning Command range Remarks (unit) Validity of synchronous control Synchronization 0 / 1 control 0: The next block is processed after the sub part system operation completes.
  • Page 909 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.9 Sub Part System Control Operation program of a sub part system When issuing the sub part system control II command, designate the program No. or program name to be operated in the sub part system with command address A or <file name>.
  • Page 910 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.9 Sub Part System Control (1) When the multi-part system program management is enabled ("#1285 ext21/bit0" is set to "1") O100 Main part system ($1) O1 - $1 Sub part system G144 A100 D1 B10；...
  • Page 911 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.9 Sub Part System Control Sub part system activation with the completion wait method (D=0) If "0" is designated for command address D when the sub part system control II command is issued, or if command address D is omitted, the calling part system will wait for the called sub part system to complete (to M99 or the end sequence No.) before starting the next block.
  • Page 912 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.9 Sub Part System Control Activation of a sub part system with parallel processing mode (D=1) If "1" is designated for command address D when the sub part system control II command is issued, the following blocks of the calling part system and the first and the following blocks of the sub part system will be operated in parallel.
  • Page 913 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.9 Sub Part System Control Activate a sub part system from another sub part system A sub part system can be activated from another sub part system. The number of sub part systems to be processed simultaneously depends on the model. The following shows the operation and the activation timing of each part system.
  • Page 914 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.9 Sub Part System Control Sub part system activation command to a sub part system being activated If G144 is commanded while a sub part system is being activated, using the same identification No. (B command), the machine will wait for the earlier sub part system to complete activation, before activating the next sub part sys- tem.
  • Page 915 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.9 Sub Part System Control Operation example In the following example, multiple machining operations can be performed simultaneously by controlling some of the axes in the main part system with a sub part system and operating the main part system and the sub part system in parallel.
  • Page 916 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.9 Sub Part System Control (1) Machining process when sub part system control is OFF Main part system ($1) Subprogram O100 G140 Z=A1; ... (a) M98 P100; M03 S1500; ...
  • Page 917 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.9 Sub Part System Control (2) Machining process when sub part system control is ON Main part system ($1) Sub part system O100 G140 Z=A1; ... (a) G144 A100 D1 B10; M03 S1500;...
  • Page 918 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.9 Sub Part System Control Relationship with Other Functions Timing synchronization with sub part system While a sub part system is under control, timing synchronization between part systems can be issued with the "![Part system No.]"...
  • Page 919 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.9 Sub Part System Control Screen display of a sub part system When the number of main part systems is designated in the parameter "#11055 Disp. sysno" (the number of part systems to be displayed), sub part systems are not displayed.
  • Page 920 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.9 Sub Part System Control Arbitrary Axis Exchange Control In the sub part system control II, the just started sub part system has no axis. To control the axis in a sub part system, carry out axis exchange (to transfer the control rights of the specified axis from other part systems to the own part system) with the arbitrary axis exchange return command (G140).
  • Page 921 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 16 Multi-part System Control 16.9 Sub Part System Control Illegal modal of a sub part system control II command If the sub part system control II (G144) is commanded during the following G command modal, a program error (P652) will occur.
  • Page 922 High-speed High-accuracy Control IB-1501620-H...
  • Page 923 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 17 High-speed High-accuracy Control 17.1 High-speed Machining Mode 17High-speed High-accuracy Control 17.1 High-speed Machining Mode 17.1.1 High-speed Machining Mode I, II; G05 P1, G05 P2 Function and purpose This function runs a machining program for which a freely curved surface has been approximated by micro segments at high speed.
  • Page 924 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 17 High-speed High-accuracy Control 17.1 High-speed Machining Mode High-speed machining mode II G01 block micro segment processing capability for 1 mm segment (unit: kBPM) Specified num- Maximum feedrate when 1 mm segment G01 block is executed ber of part sys- (kBPM) tems (#8040 = 1)
  • Page 925 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 17 High-speed High-accuracy Control 17.1 High-speed Machining Mode Command format High-speed machining mode I ON G05 P1 ; High-speed machining mode II ON G05 P2 ; High-speed machining mode I/II OFF G05 P0 ; In addition to the G05 P0 command, the high-speed machining mode I is canceled when the high-speed machining mode II (G05 P2) is commanded.
  • Page 926 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 17 High-speed High-accuracy Control 17.1 High-speed Machining Mode (4) If the variable command, variable operation command, or macro control statement is commanded while high- speed machining mode II is valid, the micro segment processing capability decreases. However, only when the variable commands and variable four-basic-arithmetic operation commands shown below are issued following the axis address or the F address of the cutting feedrate command, the micro segment processing capability does not decrease.
  • Page 927 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 17 High-speed High-accuracy Control 17.1 High-speed Machining Mode Relationship with other functions Relationship between the high-speed machining mode II and G code functions Column A: Operation when the combination function is commanded while the high-speed machining mode II is en- abled Column B: Operation when the high-speed machining mode II (G05P2) is commanded while the combination func- tion is enabled...
  • Page 928 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 17 High-speed High-accuracy Control 17.1 High-speed Machining Mode Group G code Additional function (G code list: 3) Machine coordinate system selection Δ User macro simple call □ (*7) □ (*8) G110 Mixed control I (cross axis control) ○...
  • Page 929 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 17 High-speed High-accuracy Control 17.1 High-speed Machining Mode Group G code Additional function (G code list: 3) Fixed cycle cancel ○ ○ Other than G80 Fixed cycle Δ Δ Fixed cycle (Initial level return) ○...
  • Page 930 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 17 High-speed High-accuracy Control 17.1 High-speed Machining Mode (*8) Enables the high-speed machining mode II if "G05P2" is commanded in a macro program. (*9) Enables the high-speed machining mode II if "G05P2" is commanded in a sub part system. (*10) Depends on the setting of the parameter "#1148 Initial hi-precis".
  • Page 931 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 17 High-speed High-accuracy Control 17.1 High-speed Machining Mode Precautions (1) If "G05 P1(P2)" is commanded when the high-speed machining mode I/(II) specifications are not provided, a pro- gram error (P39) occurs. (2) The automatic operation process has priority in high-speed machining mode I/II, and as a result, the screen dis- play may slow down.
  • Page 932 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 17 High-speed High-accuracy Control 17.2 High-accuracy Control 17.2 High-accuracy Control 17.2.1 High-accuracy Control ; G61.1, G08 Function and purpose Machining errors caused by delays in control systems can be inhibited. This function is useful for machining which needs to make an edge at a corner or reduce an error from an inner route of curved shape.
  • Page 933 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 17 High-speed High-accuracy Control 17.2 High-accuracy Control Command format High-accuracy control valid G61.1 ; or, G08 P1; High-accuracy control invalid G08 P0; or, G command in G code group 13 except G61.1 High-accuracy control can be canceled with either command regardless of the command that has enabled the con- trol.
  • Page 934 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 17 High-speed High-accuracy Control 17.2 High-accuracy Control Detailed description (1) Feedrate command F is clamped with the "#2110 Clamp (H-precision)" (Cutting feed clamp speed for high-ac- curacy control mode) set with the parameter. (2) Rapid traverse rate enables "#2109 Rapid(H-precision)"...
  • Page 935 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 17 High-speed High-accuracy Control 17.2 High-accuracy Control Acceleration/deceleration before interpolation Acceleration/deceleration control is carried out for the movement commands to suppress the impact and to smooth out the velocity waveform when the machine starts or stops moving. However, if high-accuracy control is disabled, the corners at the block seams are rounded, and path errors occur regarding the command shape because accel- eration/deceleration is performed after interpolation.
  • Page 936 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 17 High-speed High-accuracy Control 17.2 High-accuracy Control (2) Path control in circular interpolation commands When commanding circular interpolation with the conventional "acceleration/deceleration after interpolation" control method, the path itself that is output from the NC to the servo runs further inside the commanded path, and the circle radius becomes smaller than that of the commanded circle.
  • Page 937 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 17 High-speed High-accuracy Control 17.2 High-accuracy Control Rapid traverse pre-interpolation acceleration/deceleration When "#1205 G0bdcc" (G0 pre-interpolation acceleration/deceleration) is "1", pre-interpolation acceleration/decel- eration is also enabled for rapid traverse movement. In this case, acceleration/deceleration control is performed so that the acceleration rate of each axis does not exceed the gradient determined by parameters "#2001 rapid"...
  • Page 938 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 17 High-speed High-accuracy Control 17.2 High-accuracy Control Optimum speed control When the moving direction is changed on the corner, arc, etc., acceleration rate corresponding to the amount of change and the feedrate is generated. When the acceleration rate is large, there is a possibility of machine vibration and it may leave stripes on the machining surface.
  • Page 939 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 17 High-speed High-accuracy Control 17.2 High-accuracy Control Optimum corner deceleration is not carried out when blocks are smoothly connected, because deceleration is not necessary. The criteria for whether the connection is smooth or not can be designated by the machining pa- rameter "#8020 DCC ANGLE".
  • Page 940 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 17 High-speed High-accuracy Control 17.2 High-accuracy Control C axis C axis F : Speed after passing the F : Speed before entering the corner corner F : Speed after passing the corner Acceleration rate at the corner F : Speed before entering the corner...
  • Page 941 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 17 High-speed High-accuracy Control 17.2 High-accuracy Control (3) Arc speed clamp During circular interpolation, even when moving at a constant speed, acceleration rate is generated as the ad- vance direction constantly changes. When the arc radius is large enough in relation to the commanded speed, control is carried out at the commanded speed.
  • Page 942 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 17 High-speed High-accuracy Control 17.2 High-accuracy Control Vector accuracy interpolation When a micro segment is commanded and the angle between the blocks is extremely small (when not using opti- mum corner deceleration), interpolation can be carried out more smoothly using the vector accuracy interpolation. Vector accuracy interpolation Commanded path Feed forward control...
  • Page 943 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 17 High-speed High-accuracy Control 17.2 High-accuracy Control (b) NC command and actual tool movement during Feed forward control ON 1 - Kf Here, Tp is the servo system position loop time constant (s) and Kf is the feed forward coefficient. Tp is the in- verse number to "#2203 PGN1"...
  • Page 944 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 17 High-speed High-accuracy Control 17.2 High-accuracy Control S-pattern filter control S-pattern filter (soft acceleration/deceleration filter) is the function that inhibits the machine vibration by smoothing a velocity waveform. There are following types of S-pattern filters: G01/G00 S-pattern filter G01/G00 jerk filter S-pattern filter 2...
  • Page 945 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 17 High-speed High-accuracy Control 17.2 High-accuracy Control Constant-gradient linear S-pattern filter Jerk filter acceleration/deceleration Machine vibration is likely to occur Speed Speed Speed Time Time Time Acceleration rate Acceleration rate Acceleration rate Time Time Time Jerk...
  • Page 946 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 17 High-speed High-accuracy Control 17.2 High-accuracy Control Relationship with other functions (1) The modal must be set as shown below when commanding G08 P1/G61.1. Function G code Cylindrical interpolation cancel (*1) G07.1 Polar coordinate interpolation cancel (*1) Mirror image with settings Cancel Mirror image with signals...
  • Page 947 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 17 High-speed High-accuracy Control 17.2 High-accuracy Control (Example) When parameter values set on program coordinates (orthogonal coordinates) are used in inclined axis control at an angle of inclination of 60 degrees, the acceleration rate will be set as follows. Setting values on orthogonal coordinates: #1206 =10000, #1207= 100 Acceleration rate on orthogonal coordinates (ΔV) = "#1206 G1bF"...
  • Page 948 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 17 High-speed High-accuracy Control 17.2 High-accuracy Control Operation when high-accuracy control-related G commands are combined The table below shows operations when following high-accuracy control-related commands are combined: G61.1, G8P1 : High-accuracy control : Cutting mode : Exact stop check mode : Automatic corner override : Tapping mode...
  • Page 949 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 17 High-speed High-accuracy Control 17.2 High-accuracy Control Rapid acceleration rate switching during inclined surface machining command The acceleration rate of either the cutting feed (G01) or rapid traverse (G00) can be used for the rapid traverse (G00) in the high-accuracy control mode during the inclined surface machining command.
  • Page 950 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 17 High-speed High-accuracy Control 17.2 High-accuracy Control Precautions (1) The "high-accuracy control" specifications are required to use this function If G61.1 is commanded when there are no specifications, a program error (P123) will occur. (2) "G08P1"...
  • Page 951 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 17 High-speed High-accuracy Control 17.2 High-accuracy Control 17.2.2 SSS Control Function and purpose Machining programs that approximate a freely curved surface with micro segments are run at high speed and with high-level accuracy. This function enables machining with less scratches and streaks on the cutting surface com- pared to the conventional high-accuracy control function.
  • Page 952 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 17 High-speed High-accuracy Control 17.2 High-accuracy Control Detailed description When the parameters are set as below, each of the following high-accuracy control commands is activated under SSS control. <Parameter> "#8090 SSS ON" ON <Command format of the modes activated under SSS control>"...
  • Page 953 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 17 High-speed High-accuracy Control 17.2 High-accuracy Control Parameter standard values The standard values of the parameters related to SSS control are shown below. (1) User parameters Item Standard value 8090 SSS ON 8091 StdLength 1.000 8092...
  • Page 954 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 17 High-speed High-accuracy Control 17.2 High-accuracy Control (3) Axis specification parameters (depend on the MTB specifications) Item Standard value 2010 fwd_g Feed forward gain 2068 G0fwdg G00 feed forward gain 2096 crncsp Minimum corner deceleration speed SSS control parameter [Acceleration/deceleration process] [Range for recognizing the...
  • Page 955 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 17 High-speed High-accuracy Control 17.2 High-accuracy Control 17.2.3 Tolerance Control Function and purpose This function obtains the optimum clamp speed for corners or curves based on the designated tolerance to perform operations. It also ensures smooth passing within the tolerance range in corner sections, which suppresses machine vibrations.
  • Page 956 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 17 High-speed High-accuracy Control 17.2 High-accuracy Control Command format Set the tolerance with the parameter "#2659 tolerance" or the ",K" address following the G code (G61.1 or G61.4 command). When the setting value is "0", this function runs with "0.01(mm)". Tolerance specification G61.1 or G61.4 ,K__ ;...
  • Page 957 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 17 High-speed High-accuracy Control 17.2 High-accuracy Control Parameters valid during tolerance control The parameters valid and invalid during tolerance control are as follows. Some parameters depend on the MTB specifications. (1) Valid parameters Parameter name Supplements 1206...
  • Page 958 (4) When the tolerance control is enabled (#12066 = "1"), the maximum value of the micro segment processing ca- pability is as follows. Model Maximum value of the micro segment processing capability M800V Series 135 m/min M80VW/M80V TypeA 100 m/min M80V TypeB 67.5 m/min...
  • Page 959 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 17 High-speed High-accuracy Control 17.2 High-accuracy Control 17.2.4 Initial High-accuracy Control If "#1148 I_G611" (Initial high-accuracy) is set by the MTB specifications, high-accuracy control-related functions can be enabled when the power is turned ON. At power ON, the modes set by this parameter are enabled, but each mode can be changed to a different one by commanding as follows in the machining program.
  • Page 960 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 17 High-speed High-accuracy Control 17.2 High-accuracy Control 17.2.5 High-speed High-accuracy Control in Multi-part System Function and purpose High-accuracy control and high-speed machining mode are available respectively in all part systems, however, the simultaneous usage of high-accuracy control and high-speed machining mode (including High-speed high-accuracy control) are available only in part systems which are limited by the parameter "#8040 High-SpeedAcc".
  • Page 961 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 17 High-speed High-accuracy Control 17.2 High-accuracy Control Detailed description (1) When "#1148 I_G611" (Initial hi-precis) is enabled, the initial modal state after power ON will be the high-accu- racy control mode. Refer to "17.2.4 Initial High-accuracy Control" for details. In this case, the high-accuracy control mode is enabled if the multi-part system simultaneous high-accuracy specification is provided.
  • Page 962 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 17 High-speed High-accuracy Control 17.3 High-speed High-accuracy Control 17.3 High-speed High-accuracy Control It depends on the MTB specifications whether the modal state at power ON is high-speed high-accuracy control I, II, III, or OFF. It also depends on the specifications whether to hold the modal state at reset.
  • Page 963 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 17 High-speed High-accuracy Control 17.3 High-speed High-accuracy Control (1) High-speed high-accuracy control I Number of part systems/number Number of part sys- M850V/M830V M80VW/M80V M80V TypeB of axes tems TypeA (#8040=1) 1-part system (8 axes or less) 1 part system 67.5 33.7...
  • Page 964 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 17 High-speed High-accuracy Control 17.3 High-speed High-accuracy Control Multi-part system simultaneous high-accuracy control High-speed high-accuracy control I/II can be used simultaneously in up to three part systems. High-speed high-accuracy control I/II can be used in a part system where "1" is set for the parameter "#8040 High- SpeedAcc".
  • Page 965 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 17 High-speed High-accuracy Control 17.3 High-speed High-accuracy Control Detailed description (1) The high-speed high-accuracy control I / II can be used during tape, MDI, SD card or memory modes. (2) The override, maximum cutting speed clamp, single block operation, dry run, handle interrupt and graphic trace are valid even during the high-speed high-accuracy control I / II modal.
  • Page 966 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 17 High-speed High-accuracy Control 17.3 High-speed High-accuracy Control Relationship with other functions Relationship between the high-speed high-accuracy control I and other functions (1) Relationship between the high-speed high-accuracy control I and the other G code functions Column A: Operation when the additional function is commanded while the high-speed high-accuracy control I is enabled Column B: Operation when the high-speed high-accuracy control I (G05.1Q1) is commanded while the addition-...
  • Page 967 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 17 High-speed High-accuracy Control 17.3 High-speed High-accuracy Control G code Additional function Group (G code list: 3) Local coordinate system setting Δ Machine coordinate system selection Δ User macro simple call □ (*5) □...
  • Page 968 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 17 High-speed High-accuracy Control 17.3 High-speed High-accuracy Control Group G code Additional function (G code list: 3) Tool nose radius compensation OFF ○ ○ Tool nose radius compensation ON ○ × (P29) Tool nose radius compensation ON (auto- ○...
  • Page 969 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 17 High-speed High-accuracy Control 17.3 High-speed High-accuracy Control (*6) Enables the high-speed high-accuracy control I if "G05.1Q1" is commanded in a macro program. (*7) Enables the high-speed high-accuracy control I if "G05.1Q1" is commanded in a sub part system. (*8) Enables the exact stop check mode.
  • Page 970 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 17 High-speed High-accuracy Control 17.3 High-speed High-accuracy Control Relationship between the high-speed high-accuracy control II and other functions (1) Relationship between the high-speed high-accuracy control II and G code functions Column A: Operation when the additional function is commanded while the high-speed high-accuracy control II is enabled Column B: Operation when the high-speed high-accuracy control II (G05P10000) is commanded while the ad- ditional function is enabled...
  • Page 971 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 17 High-speed High-accuracy Control 17.3 High-speed High-accuracy Control Group G code Additional function (G code list: 3) User macro simple call □ (*5) □ (*6) G110 Mixed control I (cross axis control) ○ ○...
  • Page 972 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 17 High-speed High-accuracy Control 17.3 High-speed High-accuracy Control Group G code Additional function (G code list: 3) Fixed cycle (Initial level return) ○ ○ Fixed cycle (R point level return) ○ ○ G54 - G59 Workpiece coordinate system selection ○...
  • Page 973 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 17 High-speed High-accuracy Control 17.3 High-speed High-accuracy Control (2) Relationship between the high-speed high-accuracy control II and functions other than G codes Column A: Operation when the additional function is commanded while the high-speed high-accuracy control II is enabled Column B: Operation when the high-speed high-accuracy control II (G05P10000) is commanded while the ad- ditional function is enabled...
  • Page 974 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 17 High-speed High-accuracy Control 17.3 High-speed High-accuracy Control 17.3.2 Cutting Speed Clamp with Acceleration Rate Judgment Function and purpose This function is an additional function when the high-speed high-accuracy control II mode is ON. The cutting feed clamp speed during the high-speed high-accuracy control II / III mode, when the following param- eter is set to "1", is clamped so that the acceleration rate generated by each block movement does not exceed the tolerable value.
  • Page 975 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 17 High-speed High-accuracy Control 17.3 High-speed High-accuracy Control 17.3.3 High-speed Mode Corner Deceleration Function and purpose This function is an additional function when high-speed high-accuracy control II mode is ON. During high-accuracy control, if the angle between the adjacent blocks in the machining program is large, this func- tion, conventionally, automatically decelerates the machining so that the acceleration rate generated when passing through the corner is maintained within the tolerable value.
  • Page 976 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 17 High-speed High-accuracy Control 17.3 High-speed High-accuracy Control 17.3.4 Precautions on High-speed High-accuracy Control Precautions Common precautions on high-speed high-accuracy control I/II (1) The validity of each high-speed high-accuracy control function depends on the MTB specifications. If any of the above is commanded when the corresponding specification is not available on the machine, a program error (P39) will occur.
  • Page 977 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 17 High-speed High-accuracy Control 17.3 High-speed High-accuracy Control Precautions on high-speed high-accuracy control I (1) Command "G05.1Q0;" after turning the nose radius compensation OFF. If "G05.1Q0;" is commanded without turning the nose radius compensation OFF, a program error (P29) will occur. (2) "G05.1Q1;"...
  • Page 978 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 17 High-speed High-accuracy Control 17.4 Machining Condition Selection I ; G120.1, G121 17.4 Machining Condition Selection I ; G120.1, G121 Function and purpose After initializing the machining condition parameter groups with the machining condition selection I function, the ma- chining condition parameter groups can be switched by G code command.
  • Page 979 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 17 High-speed High-accuracy Control 17.4 Machining Condition Selection I ; G120.1, G121 (10) When the emergency stop and reset (reset 1, reset 2, and reset & rewind) are performed while running the ma- chining program whose machining condition parameter group is switched by G120.1 command, it will be switched to the selected condition parameter group machining in "Machining cond"...
  • Page 980 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 17 High-speed High-accuracy Control 17.4 Machining Condition Selection I ; G120.1, G121 (1) When "Application1" and "Condition1" from the machining condition parameter group are selected in "Machining cond" (selecting) screen before running the program. (The following machining programs are assuming "I"...
  • Page 981 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 17 High-speed High-accuracy Control 17.4 Machining Condition Selection I ; G120.1, G121 Relationship with other functions (1) For M800V/M80V Series S/W version A8 or earlier, G code modal that cause a program error when commanding G120.1 and G121 are listed below.
  • Page 982 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 17 High-speed High-accuracy Control 17.4 Machining Condition Selection I ; G120.1, G121 Precautions (1) Because the parameters are switched after being decelerated once G120.1 or G121 is commanded, the work- piece may be damaged. Make sure to keep the tool away from the workpiece when commanding G120.1 and G121.
  • Page 983 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 17 High-speed High-accuracy Control 17.4 Machining Condition Selection I ; G120.1, G121 IB-1501620-H...
  • Page 984 Advanced Multi-Spindle Control Function IB-1501620-H...
  • Page 985 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 18 Advanced Multi-Spindle Control Function 18.1 Spindle Synchronization 18Advanced Multi-Spindle Control Function 18.1 Spindle Synchronization Function and purpose In a machine having two or more spindles, this function controls the rotation speed and phase of one spindle (refer- ence spindle) in synchronization with the rotation of the other spindle (synchronized spindle).
  • Page 986 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 18 Advanced Multi-Spindle Control Function 18.1 Spindle Synchronization 18.1.1 Spindle Synchronization I; G114.1 Function and purpose With the spindle synchronization I, the designation of the spindle and start/stop of the synchronization are executed by commanding G codes in the machining program.
  • Page 987 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 18 Advanced Multi-Spindle Control Function 18.1 Spindle Synchronization Address Meaning Command range Remarks (unit) If a value exceeding the command range is com- Synchronized spindle For spindle number: specification 1 to n or -1 to -n manded, a program error (P35) occurs.
  • Page 988 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 18 Advanced Multi-Spindle Control Function 18.1 Spindle Synchronization Canceling spindle synchronization G113 ; (When the spindle synchronization status of all sets is canceled) Note (1) An axis that involves any travel cannot be put in the same block as the Spindle synchronization cancel command. Doing so causes the program error (P33) when the cancel command is issued, which causes automatic opera- tion to pause.
  • Page 989 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 18 Advanced Multi-Spindle Control Function 18.1 Spindle Synchronization Rotation synchronization (1) When rotation synchronization control (command with no R address) is commanded with the G114.1 command, the synchronized spindle rotating at an arbitrary rotation speed will accelerate or decelerate to the rotation speed commanded beforehand for the reference spindle, and will enter the rotation synchronization state.
  • Page 990 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 18 Advanced Multi-Spindle Control Function 18.1 Spindle Synchronization Phase synchronization (1) When phase synchronization (command with R address) is commanded with the G114.1 command, the synchro- nized spindle rotating at an arbitrary rotation speed will accelerate or decelerate to the rotation speed command- ed beforehand for the reference spindle, and will enter the rotation synchronization state.
  • Page 991 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 18 Advanced Multi-Spindle Control Function 18.1 Spindle Synchronization Spindle synchronization phase shift amount calculation function The spindle phase shift amount calculation function obtains and saves the phase difference of the reference spindle and synchronized spindle by turning the "PLC" signal ON when the phase synchronization command is executed. When the phase is positioned to the automatically saved phase difference before executing the phase synchroniza- tion control command, phases can be aligned easier when re-grasping profile materials.
  • Page 992 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 18 Advanced Multi-Spindle Control Function 18.1 Spindle Synchronization [Automatic phase alignment of reference spindle and synchronized spindle] (1) Turn the "phase offset request" signal ON. (2) Issue the phase synchronization command (with R command). <Example>...
  • Page 993 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 18 Advanced Multi-Spindle Control Function 18.1 Spindle Synchronization Multi-step acceleration/deceleration Acceleration/deceleration time constants for up to eight steps can be selected according to the spindle rotation speed for the acceleration/deceleration during spindle synchronization. The acceleration/deceleration in each step is as follows.
  • Page 994 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 18 Advanced Multi-Spindle Control Function 18.1 Spindle Synchronization Relationship with other functions "Spindle orientation" signal (ORC) The spindle orientation is carried out with the spindle orientation command for the reference spindle while the spin- dle synchronization status remains kept.
  • Page 995 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 18 Advanced Multi-Spindle Control Function 18.1 Spindle Synchronization Guide bushing spindle synchronization The spindle synchronization (for both the reference and synchronized spindles) using the reference spindle under guide bushing spindle synchronization is enabled. However, the spindle position control (spindle/C axis control), spindle orientation control, spindle forward run in- dexing, or spindle reverse run indexing is enabled for the reference spindle under spindle synchronization only when the reference spindle under guide bushing spindle synchronization is commanded to the reference spindle...
  • Page 996 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 18 Advanced Multi-Spindle Control Function 18.1 Spindle Synchronization Precautions (1) The spindle rotating with spindle synchronization control will stop when emergency stop is applied. (2) The rotation speed clamp during spindle synchronization will follow the smaller clamp value set for the reference spindle or synchronized spindle.
  • Page 997 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 18 Advanced Multi-Spindle Control Function 18.1 Spindle Synchronization Cautions on programming (1) To enter the rotation synchronization mode while the reference spindle and synchronized spindle are chucking the same workpiece, turn the reference spindle and synchronized spindle rotation commands ON before turning the spindle synchronization mode ON.
  • Page 998 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 18 Advanced Multi-Spindle Control Function 18.1 Spindle Synchronization 18.1.2 Precautions for Using Spindle Synchronization Control Precautions Some PLC signals must be set when spindle synchronization control I or II is used. If these signals are not set, an excessive load or an alarm may occur.
  • Page 999 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 18 Advanced Multi-Spindle Control Function 18.1 Spindle Synchronization Phase error monitor The phase error can be monitored during spindle phase synchronization. Device No. Signal name Abbrevia- Description tion R6519 Phase error monitor The phase error during spindle phase synchronization control is output as a pulse unit.
  • Page 1000 M800V/M80V Series Programming Manual (Lathe System) (2/2) 18 Advanced Multi-Spindle Control Function 18.1 Spindle Synchronization 18.1.3 Spindle Position Control (Spindle/C Axis Control) under Spindle Synchronization Control Function and purpose This function enables the spindle position control (spindle/C axis control) by the reference spindle in spindle syn- chronization control mode.

This manual is also suitable for:

M80v seriesM800vw seriesM800vs seriesM80vw seriesM850vwM830vw ... Show all